Reference handbook - DL50 Metler-Toledo

Reference handbook

DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58

Titrators

1. Introduction

2. Setup

3. Methods

4. Sample data memory

5. Analysis

6. Auxiliary functions

7. DL58

8. Symbols and explanations

9. Error messages and malfunctions

10. Installation and maintenance

11. Accessories

12. Technical data

13. Index

14. Data sheet

15. ISO certificate, System validation

Introduction

1. Introduction

In contrast to the Quick Guide, this Reference Handbook provides a complete description of

the operating principles of the DL50, DL53, DL55 and DL58 Titrators. Its layout has been kept

modular to ensure future supplementation or replacement of individual sections or pages; new

texts carry the date of issue in the footer on every page.

Safety notes

Measures for your personal protection and for operational safety are described in Section 2

of the Quick Guide. We strongly advise you to read these. The symbols listed there also appear

for texts in this Reference Handbook which require safety measures.

Keywords used

appears before all texts which refer to an error in the measured value acquisition,

data storage

NOTICE

etc.

Note

appears before all texts which contain additional explanations.

Index

The index in Section 13 comprises key words from the Quick Guide and the Reference

Handbook.

Software version

The Reference Handbook applies to software version 2.x for all four titrators.

Note:

All information concerning automation in this titrator's Reference Handbook relates

to the earlier METTLER TOLEDO Sample changer ST20A. Its name continues to

appear in some places. Operation of other METTLER TOLEDO sample changers

via your titrator is described in the corresonding Operating Instructions.

The following pages provide an overview of the menus and commands which are available

under the menu and auxiliary function keys.

FCC rules

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to both

Part 15 of the FCC Rules and the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is

operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is like to cause harmful interference in which

case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

08/2004 METTLER TOLEDO DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58 1-1

Menus: Overview

Setup

Method

Resources

Titrants

Sensors

Temperature sensors

Print

Modify

SETUP

∇

Methods

Method ID

Standard methods

User methods

METTLER methods

METHOD

Print OK

Titrants

SETUP

Standard methods

METHOD

NaOH 0.1 mol/L

HCl 0.1 mol/L

HClO 4 0.1 mol/L

Esc Delete Add Modify OK

∇

Equivalence point titr'n

End point titration (EP)

Titer by EQP titration

Esc Print Modify

∇

Titrant parameters

SETUP

Method:

METHOD

Name

NaOH

Concentration [mol/L] 0.1

Titer 1

Esc Modify OK

∇

Title

Sample

Stir

Esc Modify OK

∇

Titrant names

SETUP

HCl

∆

HClO 4

AgNO 3

EDTA

∇

Esc OK

Title

METHOD

Method ID 00001

Title Equivalence point titr'n

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Esc OK

Titrant parameters

SETUP

Method: 00001

METHOD

Name HClO 4


Titer 1

Esc Modify OK

∇

Title

Sample

Stir

Esc Modify OK

∇

Methods

Method ID 00001

Standard methods

User methods

Delete Print Modify

METHOD

∇

1-2 METTLER TOLEDO DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58 08/2004

Menus: Overview

Sample

Run

No. Status Wt/vol.

Meth. ID

Samples to be analyzed

RUN

Add

Number of samples 1

Method ID 00001

User

Start

Add

SAMPLE

Defined are

RUN

New sample series

Esc OK

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141

Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L AgNO 3

Esc Print OK

Sample entry

SAMPLE

Number of samples 2

Method ID 00001

User

Esc OK

Sample No. 1

Sample ID

Weight [g] 1.23452

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0

Correction factor f 1.0

Balance 1) OK

RUN

∇

Sample No. 1

SAMPLE

Sample ID

Weight [g] 1.19831

Limits [g] 0.02 – 2.0

Correction factor f

∇

Esc

Balance 1) OK

Current sample

No. 1 of 1

Sample ID

Method ID 00001

OK

RUN

Sample No. 2

SAMPLE

Sample ID

Weight [g] 1.36712

Limits [g] 0.02 – 2.0

Correction factor f

∇

Esc

Balance 1) OK

Stir function

Wait time [s] 30

Speed [%] 80

RUN

Hold 2)

No. Status Wt/Vol. Meth. ID

1 ready 1.19831 00001

2 ready 1.36712 00001

Delete Print Modify Add

mV

E – V curve

Table Values Curve 2) Hold 2)

mL

1) appears only if a balance has been defined

2) appears only with DL55 and DL58

Result list

Method: 00001

Sample 1

R1 = 29.26 %

OK

RUN


Auxiliary functions: Overview

Sensor

Stirrer

Sensor

SENSOR

Stirrer

STIRRER

Measure potential

Measure temperature

Calibrate temperature sensors

OK

Titration stand Stand 1

Speed [%] 50

Modify Start

Measure potential

SENSOR

Stirrer

STIRRER

Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas. mV


∇

Esc Modify Start


Speed [%] 50

Stop

Measured values

SENSOR

43.7 mV

Stop

Changer

Burette

Sample changer

CHANGER

Burette

BURETTE

Change lift position

Rotate turntable

Dispense/rinse

OK

Rinse burette

Rinse tip

Dispense

OK

∇


CHANGER

Rinse burette

BURETTE

Lift position

bottom

Burette drive Drive 2

Esc Modify Start

Esc Modify 1) Start


CHANGER

Rinse burette

BURETTE

Lift position

bottom


Stop

1) appears only with DL55 and DL58

Stop


Auxiliary functions: Overview

Results

*

Report

Results 2)

RESULTS

Report 3)

REPORT

Display result list

Perform calculations

Display measured values

OK

∇

Output Printer

Results

All results

No

Yes

∇

Modify Start

Result list

Method: 00001

Sample 1

R1 = 29.26 %

Sample 2

RESULTS

OK

∇

Report

Output unit writing report

REPORT

2) The parameters appear only when results of a sample

determination are available

3) The parameters appear only when curves, results or

sample data of a sample determination are available

Misc. ...

Data

Transfer

Miscellaneous

MISC.

Data transfer

DATA TRANSFER

Define titrator settings

Adjust measuring inputs

Shorten analysis sequence

OK

∇

Memory card

Computer 4)

Remote control 4)

OK

∇

Titrator settings

MISC.

Memory card 5)

DATA TRANSFER

Date/time format

Date/time

Language

Esc Modify OK

∇

Display directory

Copy from titrator to card

Copy from card to titrator

Esc OK

∇

Formats

MISC.

Directory

DATA TRANSFER

Date format 17-OCT-1995

Time format 17:04 (24 h)

Esc Modify OK

User methods

Resources

Memory copies

Esc Print OK

4) appears only if a computer has been defined

5) appears only if memory card is formatted


Setup

Setup

Contents

Page

2. Setup .......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Titrants ....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-6

2.2 Sensors ...................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-10

2.3 Temperature sensors ................................................................................ 2-11

2.4 Polarized sensors ..................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.1 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.2 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-14

2.5 Auxiliary values ......................................................................................... 2-15

2.6 Titration stands ......................................................................................... 2-17

2.7 Peripherals................................................................................................. 2-18

2.7.1 Printer....................................................................................................... 2-18

2.7.1.1 Centronics interface: Settings for an EPSON printer ............................... 2-19

2.7.1.2 RS232 interface: Settings for an EPSON printer ..................................... 2-20

2.7.2 Balance .................................................................................................... 2-21

2.7.3 System ..................................................................................................... 2-23

2.7.4 Sample changer ....................................................................................... 2-25

2.7.5 External keyboard .................................................................................... 2-26

2.8 Solvents (with sample changer only) ...................................................... 2-27

2.8.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-27

2.8.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-27

2.8.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-28


Setup


Setup

Setup

2. Setup

In order to perform titrations, the titrator must be acquainted with the titrants and their

concentrations and the sensors with a feasible unit of measurement. It must know the burette

drive on which the burette is located and the input to which the sensor is connected. It must

also be familiar with the settings of the attached devices such as a balance or printer in order

to transfer data. In this menu you define all these chemical and mechanical resources and store

them: you set up your titrator.

When you press the Setup key, the list of resources appears:

Titrants

Sensors

Temperature sensors

Polarized sensors

Auxiliary values

Titration stands

Peripherals

Solvents (only with ST20A)

The titrants and METTLER TOLEDO sensors in most frequent use are already stored in the

titrator. You can not only delete these resources and modify their parameters, but also define

new ones.

Note: All information concerning automation in this titrator's Reference Handbook relates to

the earlier METTLER TOLEDO Sample changer ST20A. Its name continues to appear

in some places. Operation of other METTLER TOLEDO sample changers via your

titrator is described in the corresonding Operating Instructions.

NOTICE

All resources needed for the METTLER methods are stored! If you delete one

of these, the titrator will wait until the start of a titration of the method before

displaying the error message that the resource is not installed.

Print

Depending on your choice of resource, its list with the corresponding parameters will be printed

out.

Modify

The list of the selected resources appears.


Titrants

Setup

2.1 Titrants

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored titrants appear with their concentration

data:

Titrants

SETUP

NaOH 0.1 mol/L

HCl 0.1 mol/L

HCl0 4 0.1 mol/L ∇


2.1.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the titrant NaOH will be deleted from the list.

2.1.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the parameters of the titrants appear and you can change their

names and values.

Name

NaOH


Titer 1.0

Burette volume

10 mL


Titer

do not check

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Name

Concentration

Titer

You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a different

name from the list of "Titrant names" which appears:

– Scroll the menu with the ∇ key so that the selector bar is positioned on,

e.g. "HClO 4 " and confirm with OK: the name of the titrant is now HClO 4 .

Enter the concentration of the titrant in mol/L.

Change the titer only if you know its value. If you determine the titer of the

titrant with the titrator, its value will be entered here automatically together

with the date (see Titer function, Section 3.3.14).


Setup

Titrants

Burette volume

Select the volume of the burettes you wish to use with <F4>: 1, 5, 10 or

20 mL.

Burette drive Press <F4> to select: Drive 1.

DL50/DL53: These titrators do not have the "Modify" command.

Titer

You can choose whether to enter a date when you should check the titer

of the titrant:

– Press <F4>, select "check on" in the mask which appears and then

press <F4> again:

Check on

SETUP

Day 1

Month 1

Year 1997

Esc OK

If you select "check after" and then press <F4>, the following mask

appears:

Check after

SETUP

No. of days 10

Esc OK

When the date has lapsed, you will receive an appropriate message

during an ongoing titration method which uses this titer.

Date/time

You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the titer determination

of the titrant using the method function Titer and is thus entered here

automatically together with the time (see Titer function, Section 3.3.14)

As soon as you modify a parameter of the titrant, the date/time entry will

be deleted. The expiry date of the titer is an exception: If you modify this,

date and time will not be deleted.


Titrants

Setup

Storage procedure

The titrant with its modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask

and the list of titrants with OK. If you quit the list with Esc, the following message appears:

Save changes?

SETUP

No

Yes

OK

Any change to a parameter is always stored without a message if you press a Menu or Auxiliary

function key.

2.1.3 Add

With this command you add a titrant to the titrants list, e.g. NaOH of concentration 1.0 mol/L

or with a different burette volume or a titrant not yet on the list. The following parameters always

appear:

Name

NaOH


Titer 1.0

Burette volume

10 mL


Titer

do not check

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.1.2. If you define, e.g.

several NaOH solutions with the same concentration, you must also flag the names so that the

titrator can distinguish these, e.g. NaOH/1. If you do not, the following message appears:

Resource exists

SETUP

Modify name

Overwrite parameters

OK

Modify: The parameter mask for modification of the name appears.

Overwrite: The modified parameters are adopted.


Setup

Sensors

2.2 Sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored METTLER TOLEDO sensors with their

measurement unit appear:

Sensors

SETUP

DG111 pH

DG101 pH

DG113 mV ∇


You can attach the listed sensors only to a pH option (see Sections 2.4 and 10.4).

2.2.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the sensor DG111 will be deleted from the list.

2.2.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the parameters of the sensors whose names and values you can

change appear.

Name

DG111

Unit of meas.

pH

Sensor input Sensor 1

Zero point [unit] 7.0

Slope [mV/unit] –59.16

Temperature [°C] 25.0

Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

Name

Unit of measurement


name from the list of "Sensor names" that appears.

Note: You do not need to define a reference electrode as it is part of the

sensing electrode at the corresponding sensor option (see Section

10.4).

You select possible measurement units for the sensor from the selection

menu.


Sensors

Setup

Unit of measurement

mV: Either there is no other suitable measurement unit with calibration

parameters for the sensor or you need only mV. If you select

the unit mV for a sensor, the calibration parameters zero point,

slope and temperature are ignored by the titrator.

pH:

pM:

pX:

%T:

If you select pH, next enter the calibration parameters for a pH

electrode or have them entered by the titrator (see page 2-9:

Notes 1 and 2).

M represents any cation. If you select pM, next enter the calibration

parameters for a pM electrode or have them entered by

the titrator (see page 2-9: Notes 1 and 2).

X represents any anion. If you select pX, next enter the calibration

parameters for a pX electrode or have them entered by the

titrator (see page 2-9; Notes 1 and 2).

If you select %T, next enter the calibration parameters for a

phototrode (measurement unit: transmission, see "Phototrode"

Operating Instructions.

A: If you select A, next enter the calibration parameters for a

phototrode (measurement unit: transmission). The extinction

[A = -log T] is calculated from this (see Section 8.4.1: Results).

µS/cm:

If you select µS/cm, next enter the calibration parameters of the

conductivity cell.

mS/cm: If you select mS/cm, next enter the calibration parameters for

the conductivity cell.

You can perform conductivity measurements and conductivity

titrations with a conductometer fitted with an analog output.

Sensor input

Press <F4> to select: Sensor 1, 2, 3 or 4. The numbers refer to the slot

of a pH option (see Section 10.4).


Setup

Sensors

Zero point

Slope

Temperature

Date/time

The zero point is the measured value at which the sensor indicates 0 mV

voltage (measuring chain zero point).

• For the zero point of a pH electrode this is pH 0 with the unit pH.

• For the zero point of an ion selective electrode this is pM 0 with the unit

pM, or pX 0 with the unit pX.

• The zero point of the phototrode is normally 0%T (100% T =

1000 mV).

• The zero point of a conductivity cell is normally 0 µS/cm or 0 mS/cm.

The slope of the sensor is the voltage change in mV per measurement

unit.

• For the slope of a pH electrode this is the unit: mV/pH.

• For the slope of an ion selective electrode this is the unit: mV/pM or

mV/pX.

• The slope of a phototrode is normally 10 mV/%T.

• For the slope of a conductivity cell this is the unit: mV/µS * cm -1 or

mV/mS * cm -1 .

Change the temperature if necessary: The current calibration temperature

is either

• entered by you at the start of a calibration method (see Section 5.1)

or

• measured automatically if you have attached and defined a temperature

sensor (see Section 3.3.2).

You can neither enter the date nor delete it. It refers to the calibration of

the sensor using the method function Calibration and is entered here

automatically together with the time (see Calibration function, Section

3.3.13).

Notes

1. When the titrator is delivered, the defined calibration data are theoretical values of a new

sensor. You must perform a calibration of your sensor if you wish to determine accurate

values (see Calibration function, Section 3.3.13).

2. With a calibration of pH, pM or pX sensors, the calibration data (zero point, slope,

temperature) are entered here automatically together with the date.

3. As soon as you change a sensor parameter, the date/time entry is deleted.


Sensors

Setup

NOTICE

You should never transfer the calibration data of glass electrodes which you

obtain at sensor input 1 if you attach the electrode to, e.g. sensor input 2. To

obtain correct values, recalibrate the electrode!

Storage procedure

The sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter list

and the list of the sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when you

press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding section at the end of Section 2.1.2).

2.2.3 Add

With this command you add a sensor to the sensor list, e.g. a DG111 sensor with different

calibration parameters or a completely new sensor. The following parameters always appear:

Name

DG

Unit of meas.

mV


Zero point [unit] 7.0

Slope [mV/unit] –59.16


Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

You change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.2.2. If you define, e.g.

several DG111 sensors, you must also flag the name to ensure the titrator can distinguish

these, e.g. DG111/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).


Setup

Temperature sensors

2.3 Temperature sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored temperature sensors appear with the

sensor type:

Temperature sensors

SETUP

TEMP A Pt100

TEMP B Pt100

TEMP C Pt1000 ∇

Esc Modify OK

You can attach temperature sensors only to a pH option (see Section 10.4).

You can neither delete a temperature sensor from the list nor add a new one to it. However,

you can define, e.g. several Pt100s or Pt1000s at the same sensor input.

Select, e.g. TEMP A, press <F4> and the following parameters appear:

Name

TEMP A

Sensor type

Pt100

Sensor input Temp 1

Zero point [°C] 0.0

Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

Name

You can not change the sensor name.

Sensor type Press <F4> to select: Pt100 or Pt1000 (see Section 9.5).

Sensor input

Zero point

Date/time

Press <F4> to select: Temp 1, 2, 3 or 4: The numbers refer to the slot of

a pH option (see Section 10.4).

The zero point of a Pt sensor is the difference between the measured

value and a reference value, e.g. 0 °C of an ice bath.

You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the calibration of the

Pt sensor and is entered here automatically together with the time (see

Section 6.1.3).


Temperature sensors

Setup

Notes

1. The defined zero point is the theoretical value of a new Pt sensor. You must perform a

calibration of your sensor if you wish to determine the exact value. With a calibration the

zero point is entered here automatically with the date (see Section 6.1.3: Calibrate

temperature sensors).

2. As soon as you modify a parameter of the temperature sensor, the date/time entry is

deleted.

NOTICE

You should not transfer the zero point of temperature sensors which you obtain

at input Temp 1 if you attach the sensors to, e.g. input Temp 2! To obtain correct

values, recalibrate the sensor!

Storage procedure

The Pt sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter

mask and the list of the Pt sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored

when you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of

Section 2.1.2).


Setup

Polarized sensors

2.4 Polarized sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, "DM142" appears as the only polarized METTLER

TOLEDO electrode stored in the titrator:

Polarized sensors

SETUP

DM142

Esc Add Modify OK

You can attach this sensor only to a KF option (see Section 10.4).

Note: If you have added polarized sensors to the list, the Delete command appears (<F2>).

2.4.1 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the name and sensor input of the DM142 appear:

Sensor parameters

SETUP

Name

DM142


Esc Modify OK

Name

Sensor input


name from the list of "Sensor names" that appears.

Press <F4> to select: Sensor 1, 2, 3 or 4. The numbers refer to the slot

of a KF option (see Section 10.4).

Storage procedure

The sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter list

and the list of the sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when you

press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of Section

2.1.2).


Polarized sensors

Setup

2.4.2 Add

With this command you add a polarized sensor to the sensor list. The following parameters

always appear:

Sensor parameters

SETUP

Name

DM


Esc Modify OK

You change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.4.1. If you define, e.g.

several DM142 sensors, you must also flag the name to ensure the titrator can distinguish

these, e.g. DM142/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).


Setup

Auxiliary values

2.5 Auxiliary values

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the 20 memory locations for auxiliary values

appear: H1 - H20. You can use the Auxiliary value function to assign the results of a method,

such as blank values, potentials or volume or amount of substance consumption to this

memory. These values are then entered here automatically together with the date (see Section

3.3.15).

You yourself can also enter numeric values as an auxiliary value here and call them up under

the Calculation function.

Auxiliary values

SETUP

H1 1.0

H2 1.0

H3 1.0 ∇

Esc Modify OK

No auxiliary values are defined in the titrator on delivery.

You can neither delete the memory locations nor add new ones. If you select, e.g. H1 and press

<F4>, the following appears:

Auxiliary value parameters

SETUP

Auxiliary value H1

ID

Value 1.0

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Esc OK

Auxiliary value You can not change H1.

ID

Value

Date/time

Enter an identification if desired.

Enter the value.

You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the determination

of the auxiliary value using the method function Auxiliary value and is

entered here automatically together with the time (see Section 3.3.15).


Auxiliary values

Setup

Notes

1. You can delete the data of an auxiliary value only by overwriting them yourself or have the

titrator overwrite them using the Auxiliary value function.

2. The titrator does not tell you if you overwrite an auxiliary value. If you make frequent use

of the auxiliary value memory, you should thus print out a list of its values from time to time

(see page 2-3).

3. If you modify a parameter of the auxiliary value, the date/time entry is deleted.

Storage procedure

The auxiliary value with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the

parameter mask and the list of auxiliary values with OK. The modification of a parameter is

always stored when you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see appropriate paragraph

at the end of Section 2.1.2).


Setup

Titration stands

2.6 Titration stands

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the names of the five possible titration stands

appear:

Titration stands

SETUP

Stand 1

Stand 2

ST20A

Esc Modify OK

∇

Stand 1

Stand 2

ST20A

Auto stand

External stand

is the titration stand you receive with the basic version of the titrator.

is the second titration stand of a dual titration stand.

is the sample changer titration stand.

is the name of the titration stand on which you can run a sample series

without being prompted to insert the next sample (see Section 5.1). With

this stand you can use, e.g. a robot to change the samples.

is a titration stand you have set up in addition to the above-mentioned

titration stands if you, e.g. attach a stirrer to a rod stand.

You can neither delete a titration stand from the the list nor add a new one. If you select, e.g.

Stand 1 and press <F4>, the following appears:

Titration stand parameters

Name Stand 1

Stirrer output Stirrer 1

SETUP

Esc Modify OK

Name

Stirrer output

You can not change the name of the titration stand.

Press <F4> to select the output for the stirrer: Stirrer 1, 2, 3, 4 or "Not at

DL".

1, 2, 3, 4 refer to the position of the sensor option (see Section 10.4).

Select "Not at DL" if you use a stirrer which is not attached to the titrator:

The wait time specified under the Stir function is allowed to elapse within

the method, but you yourself are responsible for arranging stirring (see

Stir function, Section 3.3.3).


Peripherals

Setup

2.7 Peripherals

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the names of the devices which you can attach

to the titrator via the RS232C interfaces, the Centronics interface or the DIN socket appear.

These devices are not defined by software in the factory.

Printer

Balance

System

Sample changer

External keyboard

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

2.7.1 Printer

To define and set your printer, select Printer and press <F4>:

Printer

SETUP

Status

Printer type

Not defined

EPSON ESC/P

Esc Modify OK

Status

Printer type

Press <F4> to select "Defined".

Select the type from the selection menu:

EPSON ESC/P

HP PCL Level 3

IBM Proprinter

ASCII

GA42

You can change the settings for the selected printer in the parameter mask, which appears

when you press <F4>.

Note: On delivery of the titrator, the Centronics option is installed in slot 4 which has a parallel

interface for the printer connection (see Section 10.4). An RS option with a serial printer

interface has to be installed in slot 4 in order to use the METTLER TOLEDO Printer GA42.


Setup

Peripherals

2.7.1.1 Centronics interface: Settings for an EPSON printer

Examples of default settings for an EPSON printer:

Type

LX/SX

Paper

Fanfold

Paper format 8 1 / 2 * 11"

Automatic form feed No

Frame lines

Straight

Type

Paper

Press <F4> to select : "LX/SX" or "LQ/Stylus".

Press <F4> to select : "Fanfold" or "Single sheet".

Single sheet:

- A form feed is effected at the end of a page.

- If you select Yes for "Automatic form feed", a footer and a header will

be printed out on every page.

NOTICE

You must not trigger a line or form feed at the printer if you

have selected "Automatic form feed" for "Single sheet"!

You can do this on the titrator with the following key combinations:

<Shift + F1> triggers a line feed,

<Shift + F2> triggers a form feed.

Paper format

Form feed

Frame lines

Press <F4> to select:

• DIN A4 (width = 21 cm, length = 29.7 cm)

• 8 1 / 2 * 11" (width = 8 1 / 2 inches , length = 11 inches)

• 8 1 / 2 * 12" (width = 8 1 / 2 inches, length = 12 inches)

Press <F4> to select: "Yes" or "No".

• Yes: The printer initiates a form feed after every document.

• No: The individual documents are separated by a distance of 2 lines.

Press <F4> to select the frame for the report:

• Straight: The report is framed with straight lines.

• Dotted: The report is framed with dotted lines; this speeds up the

printout by a factor of 2.

• None (no frame): Printing is fastest with this parameter.

HP printers: Selection of the lines does not influence the speed.


Peripherals

Setup

2.7.1.2 RS232 interface: Settings for an EPSON printer

You can also attach printers to a serial interface if you have installed an RS option in slot 4 (see

Section 10.4). You can use this interface to attach a GA42 Printer. While no software settings

are necessary for the GA42 Printer, you must set its DIP switch 2 to the ON position (see GA42

Operating Instructions).

Example of the default settings for an EPSON printer:

Type

LX/SX

Paper

Fanfold

Paper format 8 1 / 2 * 11"

Automatic form feed No

Frame lines

Straight

Baudrate 2400

Parity

Even

Number of data bits 8 Bits

Number of stop bits 1 Bit

The settings for the first 5 parameters are the same as those for the

Centronics interface (see Section 2.7.1.1).

Baud rate Press <F4> to select: 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600.

Parity

Data bits

Stop bits

Press <F4> to select: "Even", "Odd" or "None".

Press <F4> to select: 7 or 8 bits.

Press <F4> to select: 1 or 2 bit(s).


Setup

Peripherals

2.7.2 Balance

To define and set your balance, select Balance and press <F4>:

Balance

SETUP

Status

Transmn mode

Not defined

Unidirectional

Esc Modify OK

Status

Transmission

mode


Press <F4> to select: "Unidirectional" or "Bidirectional".

Unidirectional

On inquiry of the weight, the balance continuously transfers the current weight value (without

a stability check), which is displayed by the titrator. You must confirm this display with <F5>

for the value to be accepted.

Titrator

Data to titrator

Balance

Configuration: "Send Cont."

Bidirectional

On inquiry of the weight, the balance transfers the current weight value when requested by the

titrator, which then displays it (with stability check).

Many METTLER TOLEDO balances show the weight limits in the balance display (see Section

4.2). The titrator accepts the stable weight value when you press either <F5> on the titrator or

the transfer key of the balance.

Command from titrator

Titrator

Data to titrator

Balance

Configuration: "Send Stable"

("Send on Transfer")


Peripherals

Setup

Notes

1. On delivery of the titrator, the Centronics option is installed which has a 9-pin RS232

interface for the attachment of a balance (see Section 10.4). If you install an RS option in

slot 4, its balance interface is 8-pin. Depending on the installation, you must then have the

right connection cable (see Section 11.2: Peripherals).

RS232 METTLER TOLEDO balances with RS interface: Order No. 59759, 229029

9-pin:

METTLER TOLEDO balances with LC interface: Order No. 229065

SARTORIUS balances with RS interface: Order No. 51190363

RS232 METTLER TOLEDO balances with RS interface: Order No. 51107195, 51107196

8-pin:

METTLER TOLEDO balances with LC interface: Order No. 229185

SARTORIUS balances with RS interface: Order No. 200495

2. The data output of the METTLER TOLEDO balance you wish to attach must be set as

follows:

• Baud rate: 2400

• Parity: even

• Mode: "Send Cont." for transmission mode Unidirectional

"Send Stable" ("Send on Transfer") for transmission mode Bidirectional.

3. The following settings are important with AT balances:

• Unit: Prt on Print/Transfer command on

g

Weighing unit in g

• Int-FACE: SENd S.Stb Data transmission mode: Standby

bd 2400 Baud rate: 2400

PAr -E- Parity: even

HS OFF Handshake (XON/XOFF) off

4. With AG, PG, AB, PB and PR balances, the LC-RS8 cable must be set as follows:

For bidirectional transfer

For unidirectional transfer

• Left switch: Position 0 • Left switch: Position 7

• Middle switch: Position 3 • Middle switch: Position 3

• Right switch: Position 4 • Right switch: Position 4

5. In case of SARTORIUS balances you must select Bidirectional as the transmission mode.

The data output of the balance you wish to attach must be set as follows:

• Data output: Ext. print command/without stability

• Baud rate: 2400

• Parity: even

• Stop bit: 1

• Weight unit: g


Setup

Peripherals

2.7.3 System

To define and set your computer or terminal, select System and press <F4>:

System

SETUP

Status

Instrument type

Not defined

Computer

Esc Modify OK

Status

Instrument type


Press <F4> to select from the selection menu:

Instrument type

SETUP

Computer

Color terminal

Monochrome term.

Esc Modify

You can modify the settings for the Computer in the parameter mask, which appears when

you press <F4>:

Baud rate 4800

Parity

Even

Number data bits

8 bits

Number stop bits

1 bit

Bar code to computer No

Character set

ASCII

Send mode

Spontaneous

Communication protocol Normal

Start/end character '{'/ CR


Parity



Peripherals

Setup

Data bits

Stop bits

Bar code



Press <F4> to select: "Yes" or "No".

Yes: If you have attached a bar-code reader to the external keyboard, the

read-in bar code will be sent directly to the computer. Depending on

the program you have loaded, this bar code can be used to trigger

commands from the computer. (See Section 6.8.4: Bar-code string

and Section 10.8.1: Attaching a bar-code reader.)

Character set Press <F4> to select: "ASCII" or "DL" .

ASCII: The standard character set (HEX 20 to HEX 7E) for the

output of text to the computer is used.

DL:

The character set used in the titrator is used.

Notice: If you select DL, you must specify 8 for the number

of data bits!

Send mode

Communication

protocol

Press <F4> to select: "Spontaneous" or "On request".

Spontaneous: The titrator sends the computer orders and data, as well

as what has been generated (assuming that the computer

is ready).

On request: The titrator waits for the corresponding inquiry from the

computer before it sends an order or data.

Press <F4> to select: "Normal" or "Reduced".

Normal: The data received by the titrator or computer are checked

and any errors given with messages (safety mechanism

active).

Reduced: The received data are neither checked nor acknowledged

so that no error messages are given (safety mechanism

passive).

Start/end Press <F4> to select: " '{' / CR " or " STX / ETX ".

character

These start and end characters for the messages to be sent depend on

the input possibility of your computer.

The computer needs an RS232C interface (DTE). The parameters baud rate, parity, number

of data bits and number of stop bits are freely selectable. Connection cables are listed in

Section 11.2.

You will find additional information on the communication between titrator and computer in

Section 6.8.2 and in the Operating Instructions for the computer interface (see Section 11.2).


Setup

Peripherals

You can change the settings for the selected Terminal in the parameter mask which appears

when you press <F4>:

Baud rate 9600

Parity

Even

Number data bits 8 bits

Number stop bits 1 bit


Parity

Data bits

Stop bits




You can use a terminal of the type DEC VT340 or DEC VT241 as a color terminal and either

a DEC VT330 or DEC VT240 type as a monochrome terminal. The connection cable is listed

in Section 11.2.

You will find additional information on the configuration of the terminals and their operation in

Section 10.9.

2.7.4 Sample changer



in some places.

To define the sample changer, select Sample changer and press <F4>:

Sample changer

SETUP

Status Not defined

Esc Modify OK

Status



Peripherals

Setup

2.7.5 External keyboard

You can attach a PC keyboard which has a DIN socket using a DIN cable (see Section 10.8:

Attaching a keyboard). To define the keyboard, select External keyboard and press <F4>:

External keyboard

SETUP

Status

Layout

Not defined

US International

Esc Modify OK

Status

Layout


Press <F4> to select: "US International", "Swiss (German)", "French",

"German" or "Polish".


Setup

Solvents

2.8 Solvents (with sample changer only)

The parameters of this resource are needed only if you have defined and attached a sample

changer. You can connect time-controlled pumps, electromagnetic valves or dispensers to the

sample changer to dispense solvents.

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored solvents appear:

Solvents (only with ST20A)

SETUP

H 2 O

CH 3 OH

CHCl 3


∇

2.8.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", H 2 O will be deleted from the list.

2.8.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the following appears:

Solvent parameters

SETUP

Name

H 2 O

Pump rate [mL/min] 200.0

ST20A output RINSE

Esc Modify OK

Name

Pump rate

You can modify the name by pressing <F4> and choosing a different

name from the list of "Solvent names" that appears.

The titrator uses the pump rate to calculate the volume to be dispensed

for time-controlled pumps or electromagnetic valves.

You must determine the pump rate of each metering device beforehand

for every solvent:

– Add the solvent using the metering device to a measuring cylinder for

1 minute (stopwatch) and note the volume.

– Repeat this procedure for, e.g. 20, 30 and 40 seconds.

– Calculate the mean value per minute for the different volumes and

enter this value.


Solvents

Setup

Output

Press <F4> to select the ST20A output to which you will attach the

metering device: "DOSE", "RINSE" or "DISPENSER".

Storage procedure

The solvent with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask

and the list of solvents with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when you

press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see appropriate paragraph at the end of Section 2.1.2).

2.8.3 Add

You can use this command to add a solvent to the list of solvents. The following mask always

appears:

Solvent parameters

SETUP

Name

H 2 O

Pump rate [mL/min] 200.0

ST20A output RINSE

Esc Modify OK

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section

2.8.2.

If you define, e.g. several solvents with the same name, you must also flag these to ensure the

titrator can distinguish them, e.g. H 2 O/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).


Method

Method

Contents

Page

3. Methods ..................................................................................................... 3-3

3.1 Selecting methods .................................................................................... 3-4

3.1.1 Method ID.................................................................................................... 3-4

3.1.2 Standard methods ....................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.3 User methods .............................................................................................. 3-6

3.1.4 METTLER methods..................................................................................... 3-6

3.2 Modifying a method .................................................................................. 3-7

3.2.1 Storage procedure ...................................................................................... 3-7

3.3 Functions ................................................................................................... 3-10

3.3.1 Title.............................................................................................................. 3-11

3.3.2 Sample ........................................................................................................ 3-12

3.3.3 Stir ............................................................................................................... 3-16

3.3.4 Measure ...................................................................................................... 3-17

3.3.5 Dispense ..................................................................................................... 3-19

3.3.6 EQP titration (equivalence point titration).................................................... 3-20

3.3.6.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-20

3.3.6.2 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-21

3.3.6.3 Titrant addition............................................................................................. 3-22

3.3.6.4 Measure mode ............................................................................................ 3-25

3.3.6.5 Recognition ................................................................................................. 3-28

3.3.6.6 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-33

3.3.6.7 Evaluation ................................................................................................... 3-34

3.3.7 EP titration (end point titration).................................................................... 3-37

3.3.7.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-37

3.3.7.2 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-38


3.3.7.4 End point ..................................................................................................... 3-41

3.3.7.5 Tendency ..................................................................................................... 3-42

3.3.7.6 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-42

3.3.8 Learn titration .............................................................................................. 3-43


Method

Method

Page

3.3.9 EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................................................................. 3-45

3.3.9.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-45

3.3.9.2 Indication ..................................................................................................... 3-46

3.3.9.3 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-48


3.3.9.5 Measure mode ............................................................................................ 3-49

3.3.9.6 Recognition ................................................................................................. 3-50

3.3.9.7 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-52

3.3.9.8 Evaluation ................................................................................................... 3-53

3.3.10 EP titration (Ipol/Upol) ................................................................................. 3-56

3.3.10.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-56

3.3.10.2 Indication ..................................................................................................... 3-57

3.3.10.3 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-59


3.3.10.5 End point ..................................................................................................... 3-60

3.3.10.6 Tendency ..................................................................................................... 3-61

3.3.10.7 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-61

3.3.11 pH/mV-stat .................................................................................................. 3-62

3.3.12 Calculation .................................................................................................. 3-66

3.3.13 Calibration ................................................................................................... 3-69

3.3.14 Titer ............................................................................................................. 3-72

3.3.15 Auxiliary value ............................................................................................. 3-73

3.3.16 Report ......................................................................................................... 3-74


Method

Method

3. Methods

The titrator performs analyses automatically with the aid of predefined methods. When the

titrator is delivered, the Method menu already holds standard methods and methods developed

by METTLER. You can modify these methods to suit your requirements and save them

as User methods.

A complete titration method comprises sample preparation, dispensing of auxiliary solutions,

stirring and wait times, the actual titration, result calculation and a report. These sub-steps are

defined as Functions in the titrator and they are executed in succession in an analysis. The

individual functions comprise Parameters, whose values or names you can modify.

You modify a method by changing the parameters of the preset functions.

Method

Functions

Parameters

modify


Selecting methods

Method

3.1 Selecting methods

When you press the Method key, the following appears in the display:

Method ID _ _ _ _ _

Standard methods

User methods

METTLER methods

Under Method ID you can call up a method stored with an identification number; these are the

user and METTLER methods.

Standard methods are methods we have entered in the factory without a method identification.

User methods are the methods you have defined and saved (they are stored in the user data

memory).

METTLER methods are applications we have developed and stored for you.

Print

Method ID:

Method groups:

The recalled method is printed out with its functions and parameters.

The list of methods of the selected group is printed out.

3.1.1 Method ID

The method identification is the 5-place, numeric identifier of a method (see Title function,

Section 3.3.1).

– If you are familiar with the identification, enter it and press <F4>: The list of the functions of

this method appears (see Section 3.2).

Methods

Method ID 00001

Standard methods

User methods

Delete Print Modify

METHOD

∇

Note: With user methods, you can enter an asterisk (*) after the first, second or third digit of

the method ID: This replaces the remaining digits, e.g. 1*: All methods whose ID starts

with 1 appear in the display. When you confirm the desired ID with OK, the function list

of the selected method appears immediately.


Method

Selecting methods

Delete

When you press <F2>, the selection menu "Delete method?" appears in which you can confirm

or cancel the command:

• Yes: The method will be deleted.

• No: The method remains stored.

If you wish to delete a METTLER method or a user method that is stored in the sample data

memory, an error message appears. You can not delete these methods (see Section 3.1.4 and

4.1).

3.1.2 Standard methods

If you select this group, the list of 21 methods entered in the factory appears with titles (see

Section 5.2 of the Quick Guide). The standard methods are used as basic methods for the

development of your own methods and can not be called up to perform an analysis as they

have no method identification.

As soon as you allocate an identification to a standard method, it is automatically stored as a

user method with a method ID when saved and can be called up by you for the analysis.

The parameters of the other functions are defined with default values or names for all methods;

you can accept or modify these (see Sections 3.2 and 3.3).

Print

The selected method with its functions and parameters is printed.


Selecting methods

Method

3.1.3 User methods

If you select this group, a list of methods with the identification (and the name) first appears

if you have stored modified standard or METTLER methods, e.g.:

User methods

METHOD

61

11152

00001 ∇

Esc Delete Print Modify

Delete

When you press <F2>, the selection menu "Delete method?" appears in which you can confirm

or cancel the command:

• Yes: The method will be deleted.

• No: The method remains stored.

Note: The "Delete" command is not available when the method is stored in the sample data

memory (see Section 4.1).

Print


3.1.4 METTLER methods

If you select this group, a list of applications developed by us with the identification and the

name of the method appears:

METTLER methods

METHOD

90001 Acid content

90002 Calibration pH electrode

90003 Calibration F - electrode ∇

Esc Print Modify

You can modify METTLER methods to suit your requirements, but you must then give them a

new method identification under the Title function in order to save them (see Section 3.3.1).

Print



Method

Modifying a method

3.2 Modifying a method

You have selected, e.g. the "Equivalence point titration" under standard methods and then

press <F4>: The list of the functions of this method appears.

Title

Sample

Stir

EQP titration

Calculation

Calculation

Calculation

Report

You can modify the parameters of all functions:

– Select the function and press <F4>: The mask with the Parameters defined for the function

appears and you can then change their values and names (see Section 3.3).

3.2.1 Storage procedure

1. Every modified method is stored when you

• confirm the corresponding parameter masks of the individual functions and

• the list of the functions with OK.

If you switch off the titrator before doing this, your changes will be discarded: all parameters

are first written to the RAM (volatile memory) of the titrator and are not stored until the

function list has been confirmed.

After modification of the parameters of a function, you can save the method. The following

sequence is an example of the standard method "Equivalence point titration":

Method:

METHOD

Title

Sample

Stir

Esc Modify OK

∇

You modify the Title function by entering, e.g. the method identification

00001 and confirming it with OK (see also Section 3.3.1):


Modifying a method

Method

Method: 00001

METHOD

Title

Sample

Stir

Esc Modify OK

∇

If you now press <F5>, the mask of the method groups reappears: the

method is stored.

Methods

Method ID 00001

Standard methods

User methods

Delete Print Modify

METHOD

∇

As method 00001 is selected automatically, the list of the functions

reappears immediately when <F4> is pressed to allow modification of

other functions.

2. If you quit the list of the functions with Esc after you have modified parameters of functions,

the following appears:

Save method?

METHOD

No

Yes

OK

No: Changes are not stored.

Yes: The titrator stores all modified parameter values.

The same message appears if you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key.


Method

Modifying a method

3. Several functions such as "EQP titration" have a list of parameters which have subparameters.

If you quit their mask with Esc after modifications, the following appears:

Save changes?

METHOD

No

Yes

OK

No: Changes are not stored.

Yes: The titrator stores the modified parameter values.

4. On storage, the titrator checks the method and, if it has found several errors, draws your

attention to the first of them.

a. When you have confirmed the error message, the list of method functions appears with

the selection bar on the first faulty function. After you have corrected its parameters and

saved the method again, the next faulty function appears etc.

b. If you have entered an existing method identification under the Title function, the following

appears:

Method ID exists

METHOD

Modify ID

Overwrite method

OK

Modify ID

The list of method functions appears; under the Title function you can

modify the method ID and then save the method.

Overwrite method

The new or modified method is stored, that with the same identification

deleted.


Functions

Method

3.3 Functions

You select all functions whose parameters you wish to modify by the procedure described in

Sections 3.1 and 3.2. The following explanations of all functions of the standard and METTLER

methods as well as their parameters thus pertain to the Modify command. The order of the

following sections corresponds to the below list of functions.

Title

Sample

Stir

Measure

Dispense

EQP titration

EP titration

Learn titration

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol)

EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

pH/mV-stat

Calculation

Calibration

Titer

Auxiliary value

Report


Method

Title

3.3.1 Title

This function is used for recognition of the titration method. You must enter its method ID

parameter. You use this identification to call up the stored methods. The function has no

meaning in the sequence of the method. The following example shows the title mask of the

standard method "Equivalence point titration" (see Sections 3.2. and 3.2.1).

Title

Method ID

_ _ _ _ _

Title Equivalence point titr'n

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Esc

METHOD

OK

Method ID

Title

Date/time

Enter a number with max. 5 characters (letters also admissible).

You can not enter identifications in the range 90000 to 99999: they are

reserved for METTLER methods.

Asterisks (*) are not allowed for the method ID!

Enter a title for the method.

Date and time are entered here automatically when you save a modified

method. You can neither delete not overwrite this information.


Sample

Method

3.3.2 Sample

Here you define the parameters needed for the entry of the sample data such as weight or

volume, the titration stand on which the sample should be titrated and whether the temperature

of the sample solution should be measured.

Sample ID

Entry type

Weight

Molar mass M 100

Equivalent number z 1


Temperature sensor Manual

Note: If samples which are determined with this method are stored in the sample data memory

as "ready", you can not modify the sample ID and the entry type (see Section 4.1).

During a sample series, you can modify only the numeric parameter values for the

ST20A titration stand (see following page and Section 5.2.3).

Sample ID

Entry type

Enter the identification of the sample if required. This is adopted for all

samples of a sample series. You can also enter and modify the ID in the

Sample menu (see Section 4.1).

Select from the selection menu: "Weight", "Volume" or "Fixed volume".

Weight: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can define the range

which the sample weight should not violate:

• Lower limit [g]

• Upper limit [g]

Volume: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can define the range

which the added volume should not violate:

• Lower limit [mL]

• Upper limit [mL]

You do not enter the actual weight or volume until the sample preparation

or when the titrator requests this information after the start of the method

(see Section 5.1). If you violate the defined range, you receive an appropriate

message.

Fixed volume: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can enter the

volume.

You can not modify this entry in the sample preparation!


Method

Sample

Molar mass M

Equivalent

number z

Titration stand

Temperature

sensor

You can enter only one molar mass and one equivalent number for the

calculation. If your sample contains several substances which have to be

determined by equivalence points in the titration, you must enter their

molar mass and equivalent number in constant C under the Calculation

function (see Section 3.3.12).

Select the titration stand at which you wish to determine the sample from

the selection menu: "Stand 1", "Stand 2", "ST20A", "Auto stand" or

"External stand" (see Section 2.6).

Press <F4> to select the sensor if you have attached one; if not, select

"Manual": the temperature entered before starting the method will then be

adopted in the processing of the method (see Section 5.1).

This parameter is used for the automatic measurement or adoption of the

temperature of the sample solution before the start of the Measure,

EQP/EP/Learn titration and pH/mV-stat functions. Thus the slope of the

pH electrode is temperature-corrected and incorporated in the calculation

of the pH value (see Section 2.3: Temperature sensors).

ST20A titration stand

If you are working with a sample changer, here you define whether you wish to pump solvent,

rinse the sensor and/or condition. Press <F4> to display:

Pump

Pump

Rinse

Conditioning

No

No

No

No

Pump (1)

You have attached a pump to the sample changer that should pump

solvent into the titration vessel before every titration.

– Press <F4> to activate the parameter, in the mask that appears select

"Yes" and then press <F4> again:

Pump

METHOD

Solvent

H 2 O

Volume [mL] 10

Stir

No

Esc Modify OK


Sample

Method

Pump (1)

Pump (2)

Rinse

– Select the solvent from the list (press <F4>) which contains the

solvents you have defined in the Setup menu. This solvent also defines

the ST20A output to which you must attach the pump (see Section 2.8).

– Enter the volume that should be dispensed. You have defined the

pump rate of the device in the Setup menu.

– Select whether the dispensing operation should be stirred (Yes) or not

(No).

If you have attached a second pump to the sample changer, this will be

activated as soon as the first dispensing operation is at an end.

– To activate the parameters, press <F4>, select “Yes” in the mask that

appears and then press <F4> again: The same mask as described

under Pump (1) appears.

Selecting the solvent also defines the ST20A output to which you must

attach the second pump (see Section 2.8).

You have installed a rinsing unit in the titration head and attached a pump

to the sample changer to rinse the sensor and burette tip after every

titration.

– Press <F4> to activate the parameter, select "Yes" in the mask that

appears and press <F4> again:

Rinse

METHOD

Solvent

H 2 O

Volume [mL] 10

Esc Modify OK

– Select the solvent from the list (press <F4>) which contains the

solvents you have defined in the Setup menu. Selecting this solvent

also defines the ST20A output to which you must attach the pump (see

Section 2.8).

– Enter the volume which should be dispensed.

Note: If you run sample series in succession on the sample changer

(possible only with DL55/DL58) and the titrator has titrated the last

sample of the last method, the sensor and burette tip are rinsed in

the middle beaker position. The sample beaker is then raised to

ensure the sensor does not dry out, in other words it remains in the

sample solution.

To prevent this, you must insert a conditioning beaker after the last

sample beaker.


Method

Sample

Conditioning

You must activate this parameter if you wish to condition the sensor:

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears then press <F4>

again:

Conditioning

METHOD

Time [s] 10

Interval 1

Rinse

No

Esc OK

– Enter the time for conditioning.

– Enter the Interval (number of samples), e.g. 3, in other words,

conditioning must be performed after every third sample.

– If the sensor and burette tip have to be rinsed after the conditioning,

select Rinse and define the solvent and volume for this rinsing

operation (see page 3-14).

Notes

The following are defined (example): 10 s, 3 as interval and rinse 10 s

with H 2 O:

1. The ST20A conditions with the defined parameters if you place a

conditioning beaker after every 3rd sample beaker (always mark

conditioning beakers with red stopper plugs!)

S1

S2

S3

C

S4

S5

S6

C

S7

S8

S9

C

2. The ST20A conditions and rinses with the defined parameters if it

detects a conditioning beaker after a sample beaker.

S1

S2

C

S3

C

S4

S5

S6

C

S7

S8

S9

3. If the ST20A does not detect a conditioning beaker after the 3rd

sample beaker, it searches for one by rotating backward. It then

conditions for 10 s, but does not perform rinsing to avoid overflow of

the beaker contents.

C

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

C

4. After the last sample of a series, the time and rinse parameters are not

executed anymore.


Stir

Method

3.3.3 Stir

You can modify the stirring speed and stirring and wait times.

Stir

METHOD

Speed [%] 50

Time [s] 10

Esc

OK

Speed

Time

•0 % → The stirrer is at a standstill;

•100% → The stirrer stirs at maximum speed.

The speed you define applies to all following functions up to the next

Stir function.

However, you can also change the speed during a titration (see Section

6.2).

• "0" means that the titrator does not wait at all,

• "10" means that it waits 10 s before it starts the next function: It then

stirs at the defined speed. The remaining stirring time appears in the

display.


Method

Measure

3.3.4 Measure

You measure the potential of a solution under defined conditions. The titrator determines the

measured value as raw result E (see note 2 at the end of this section).

Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV

∆E [mV] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) mode

Fix

t(max) [s] 30

Sensor

Unit of measurement

∆E [mV]

∆t [s]

t(min) mode

Press <F4> to open the list containing the sensors you have defined in

the Setup menu (see Section 2.2). Confirm the one you want with OK.

The defined measurement unit is entered automatically.

If you select the unit from the selection menu, you should select mV or the

unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an error

message when the method is started.

The drift of the electrode potential must be less than ∆E/∆t (0.5 mV/s)

during the period ∆t (1 s) for the measured value to be acquired. This

happens within a defined time span t(min) and t(max). (See diagram in

Section 3.3.6.4: Equilibrium controlled measure mode).

t(min) is the earliest time for measured value acquisition. Select t(min)

from the selection menu:

t(min) mode

METHOD

Fix

E > set value

E < set value

Esc

Modify

Fix: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can modify t(min).

E greater than set value:

E less than set value:

Instead of a fixed time, you can enter a condition:

The measured value must be greater or

less than a certain set value: Press <F4> to

show the mask in which you enter the set value

[mV, pH, ...].


Measure

Method

t(max) [s]

t(max) is the latest time for measured value acquisition.

If you have selected one of the conditions for t(min), the titrator starts the

next function only when the measured potential E is greater or less than

the set value and the drift condition is met, but at the latest after t(max).

Notes

1. If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature of

the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this function. If

you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the temperature

entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is temperature-corrected

by this measured or entered value and incorporated in the calculation of the pH value.

2. The Measure, Dispense, EQP/EP/EQP (Ipol/Upol)/EP (Ipol/Upol)/EP/Learn titration and

pH/mV-stat functions generate Raw results (see Section 8.1: List of symbols). These you

can

• print out as such on the attached printer (see Sections 3.3.16 and 8.1.1 for exceptions).

• incorporate in the calculation (see Examples of formulas: Section 8.4).

• obtain as a result if you assign them to the result R: e.g. R = E (see Section 3.3.12).

At the end of a titration, you obtain only the final results in the display of the titrator, the raw

results you can only print out.

The titrator stores raw results up to the determination of the next sample within a sample

series (see Section 8.5.6).


Method

Dispense

3.3.5 Dispense

You dispense a certain volume of a titrant with a METTLER TOLEDO burette. The titrator

determines the dispensed volume as the raw result VDISP [mL] or QDISP [mmol] (see Section

8.1: List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measure function).

Dispense

METHOD

Titrant

NaOH


Volume [mL] 1.0

Esc Modify OK

Titrant

Concentration

Volume

Press <F4> to open the list containing the titrants you have defined in the

Setup menu (see Section 2.1). Confirm the one you want with OK.

The defined concentration of the titrant is entered automatically.

Enter the volume to be dispensed. Instead of a number, you can enter a

formula.

Note: If you do not need the Dispense function in the method, enter 0 for the volume: The

function will then be skipped during the analysis.


EQP titration

Method

3.3.6 EQP titration (equivalence point titration)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an equivalence point titration. The equivalence

point is that point at which exactly the same number of equivalents of titrant and analyte have

reacted. In most cases, it is virtually identical to the inflection point of the titration curve. This

inflection point is recognized and the equivalence point calculated.

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation

The titrator determines several measured values and volumes as raw results including the half

neutralization value EHNV (see Section 8.1: List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measure

function).

Note: If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature

of the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this

function. If you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the

temperature entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is

temperature-corrected by this measured or entered value and incorporated in the

calculation of the pH value.

3.3.6.1 Titrant/Sensor

To modify the titrant or sensor, press <F4>:

Titrant

NaOH


Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV

Titrant

Concentration





Method

EQP titration: Predispensing

Sensor

Unit of measurement


the Setup menu (see Section 2.2.). Confirm the one you want with OK.





3.3.6.2 Predispensing

Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of four predispensing modes


to volume

to potential

to slope

to (factor x sample size)

No

Volume

Potential

Slope

Factor x

sample size

No

You dispense a specified volume [mL] which you can enter when you

press <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.

You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waits

for this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.

You dispense to a specified potential [mV, pH, ....] that you can enter


You dispense to a specified slope [mV, pH, ..../mL] of the titration curve;

this you can enter when you press <F4>.

You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product of

the sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor when

you press <F4>.

You can also enter a wait time (see “Volume”).

You do not wish to predispense.

In predispensing to volumes or (sample size x factor), the titrator adds the titrant in three steps

(4/7, 2/7, 1/7 of the defined volume), which allows optimum calculation of the addition

increment in the subsequent dynamic titration. In the predispensing to potential or slope, the

titrant addition follows the selected parameters of the main titration, but the increments are

larger.


EQP titration: Titrant addition

Method

The titrator acquires the potential values ET1 and ET2 in the predispensing.

ET1: Potential at the start of predispensing

or the titration

ET2: Potential after predispensing

Predispensing to

a: Volume or

(factor x sample size)

b: Potential

c: Slope

3.3.6.3 Titrant addition

You select the dynamic or incremental addition mode:

Titrant addition

METHOD

Dynamic

Incremental

Esc Info Modify

You can not decide what addition mode is optimum for your method until you know the titration

curve. You can obtain general information by pressing <F3>:

• You generally select the dynamic addition mode for acid/base titrations in aqueous media

or for argentometric and redox titrations,

• the incremental for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media or for complexometric, redox

and surfactant titrations.

Dynamic

The volume increment added by the titrator changes within the defined

smallest and largest increment: ∆V(min) and ∆V(max). This should lead

to a constant potential difference ∆E per increment.

Dynamic

METHOD

∆E(set) [mV] 8.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.02

∆V(max) [mL] 0.15

Esc Help OK


Method


Dynamic

∆E ∆E ~ ∆E(soll) ∆E(set)

∆E 4

∆E 3

∆E 5

E [mV]

∆V 3

∆V 4

V [mL]

If no predispensing takes place, the titrator dispenses the first two volume

increments with ∆V(min).

Help

If you press <F3>, you can adopt the values for all three parameters from

the mask that appears. With the proposed value groups, sufficient

measured points in the vicinity of the equivalence point should be

generated to optimize its evaluation:

• For steep titration curves, a value for ∆E must be selected which is

smaller than for flat titration curves, e.g. 8 mV.

• For titration curves which show a sudden potential change, small

values for ∆E and ∆V(max) should be selected, e.g. 4 mV.

E [mV]

steep curve

flat curve

curve with sudden

potential jump

V [mL]



Method

Dynamic

Note: The smallest increment that the titrator can dispense is 1/5000 of

the burette volume:

1 mL burette → 0.0002 mL 5 mL burette → 0.001 mL

10 mL burette → 0.002 mL 20 mL burette → 0.004 mL

Incremental

The volume increment added by the titrator is constant.

Incremental

METHOD

∆V [mL] 0.3

Esc Help OK

E [mV]

∆E 14

∆E 13

∆E 12

∆V 12 ∆V 14

V [mL]

Help

If you press <F3>, you can adopt a value for ∆V from the mask that

appears. The proposed values are intended to achieve the same goal as

in the dynamic titrant addition: sufficient measured points in the vicinity of

the equivalence point to optimize its evaluation:

• For steep titration curves, a smaller ∆V must be selected than for flat

curves to ensure there are sufficient measured points at the equivalence

point.

• For titration curves which exhibit a sudden potential change, a small ∆V

should be selected.


Method

EQP titration: Measure mode

3.3.6.4 Measure mode

You select the equilibrium controlled or timed increment measured value acquisition:

Measure mode

METHOD

Equilibrium controlled

Timed increment

Esc Info Modify

These parameters are used to define the wait time up to measured value acquisition following

an incremental addition. In the equilibrium controlled measure mode, the wait time is variable,

in the timed increment it is constant. You can not decide the optimum measure mode for your

method until you know the reaction time of the components and the response time of the sensor

used. General information is available under <F3>:

• Select the equilibrium controlled measure mode for, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous

media, argentometric, complexometric, surfactant and redox titrations.

• the timed increment mode for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media.

Equilibrium

controlled

∆E [mV] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 3.0

t(max) [s] 30.0

Before the titrator adds the next increment, an equilibrium must be

established in the solution; the measured value must stabilize.

The following are responsible for the equilibrium

• the potential change ∆E measured in the solution

within the defined time ∆t.

The wait time up to the next increment addition also depends on the

definition of the

• minimum time t(min) and

the maximum time t(max)

As soon as the potential change of the solution is less than the defined

equilibrium (∆E/∆t), the titrator acquires the measured value and adds the

next increment.

This can be at t(min) at the earliest and should be at t(max) at the latest.

At t(max) the measured value is in any case acquired, even if the

equilibrium condition is not yet met.



Method

Equilibrium

controlled

E [mV]

164

163

162

161

160

∆t = 2 s

a

∆E = 1 mV

159

158

157

∆t = 2 s

a

∆E = 1 mV

t(min)

156

155

b

154

153

152

t(min)

b

Increment addtion

151

Increment addition

t [s]

0 1 t(min) 5 0 1 t(min) 5

7

a: The defined equilibrium condition is not yet met.

t(min): The equilibrium condition is not met after 3 s.

b: The equilibrium condition is met for the first time after 5.4 or 6.9 s.

This measure mode results in fast increment addition in the flat part of the

titration curve and slow addition in the steep part.

In addition to the potential, the titrator acquires the time and the titrant

volume. You can print out these measured values after the titration of a

sample (see Section 3.3.16: Report).

Help

When you press <F3>, you can adopt suggested values for all four

parameters from the mask that appears:

• Fast titrations are, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous media,

• slow titrations, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media.


Method


Timed increment

After every increment addition, the titrator allows the time you have

defined to elapse before it acquires the measured value.

Timed increment

METHOD

∆t [s] 3.0

Esc Help OK

Help

When you press <F3>, you can adopt suggested values for the time

interval from the mask that appears:

• Enter small time intervals for, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous

media,

• large intervals for, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media,

• 90 seconds for, e.g. TAN/TBN titrations of oils.

E [mV]

Measured

value

Measured

values

Increment addtion

Increment addition

Increment addition

∆t 1 = 3 s ∆t 2 = 3 s ∆t 3 = 3 s

t [s]


EQP titration: Recognition

Method

3.3.6.5 Recognition

Recognition of the equivalence point of a titration curve depends on the type of reaction of the

components and hence on the evaluation procedure (see Section 3.3.6.7):

1. With the evaluation procedures Maximum and Minimum, an equivalence point is recognized

when the greatest (smallest) potential value of the titration curve is greater (less) than

two preceding and two subsequent values.

2. With the evaluation procedures Standard and Asymmetric, an equivalence point is recognized

when the maximum of the absolute values of the 1st derivative of the titration curve

is greater than two preceding and two subsequent values.

3. With the evaluation procedure Segmented, an equivalence point is recognized when the

maximum of the absolute values of the 2nd derivative of the titration curve is greater than


Note: For the first recognition of a possible equivalence point, the titrator needs a certain

number of measured points.

• The number depends on the evaluation procedure.

• Measured points of a predispensing are not taken into account!

Evaluation procedure First possible EQP Required number

at

of measured points

Minimum/Maximum 4th measured point 6

Standard 4th measured point 6

Asymmetric 4th measured point 10

Segmented 5th measured point 8

Example illustrating the evaluation procedure Minimum: If the lowest potential value is

found at the third measured point, it is not recognized as an equivalence point.

You must or can support the equivalence point recognition using four parameters:

Threshold 10.0

Steepest jump only No

Range

No

Tendency

None


Method


Threshold

To ensure that minor disturbances in the curve profile are not recognized

as equivalence points, you must determine a threshold value:

+/-E, ∆E/∆V or ∆ 2 E/∆V 2 . This must be exceeded.

Notes

1. The threshold value should be maximum half as large as the expected

maximum value of the first or second derivative at the equivalence

point.

2. The threshold value depends on so many factors (solvent, concentration,

sensor, type of reaction, etc.) that you can not define the "correct"

threshold value until you have performed the first titration.

Info

You can obtain general information on threshold values in the standard

evaluation if you press <F3>:

• For steep, normal and flat titration curves, ranges of threshold

values are given for the first derivative in "pH/mL" and "mV/mL".

With the other evaluation procedures, you can enter one of the following

values for the first titration:

Evaluation procedure mV pH/pM/pX %T

Minimum/Maximum 0 0 0

Asymmetric 10 0.2 1

Segmented 10 0.2 1

Using the corresponding titration curve or the table of measured

values (there is no table for the 2nd derivative), you can read off the

potential value, the values for ∆E/∆V or the values for ∆ 2 E/∆V 2 and

then enter the threshold value.



Method

Threshold

Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedure Minimum

E [mV]

+100

The minimum of this titration curve lies

at -150 mV. You can enter, for example,

-30 as the threshold value. The

sign for the mV value must be entered.

0

-30

Threshold value

-100

Minimum

V [mL]

Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedures Standard

and Asymmetric

Titration curve

E [mV]

V [mL]

1st derivative

∆E/∆V [mV/mL]

Maximum (absolute)

Measured value

Threshold

value

V [mL]


Method

EQ titration: Recognition

Threshold

Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedure Segmented

Titration curve

E [mV]

V [mL]

1st derivative

∆E/∆V [mV/mL]

V [mL]

2nd derivative ∆ 2 E/∆V 2 [mV/mL 2 ]

Maximum (absolute)

Measured value

Threshold value

V [mL]

Steepest jump

only

You can also select this parameter for recognition of the equivalence

point (press <F4>): The titrator then recognizes only the steepest jump of

the titration curve.



Method

Range

You can also define a potential range for recognition of the equivalence

point. Equivalence points which lie outside this range are not recognized.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears and then press <F4>

again:

Range

METHOD

Limit A [mV,pH,..] 100

Limit B [mV,pH,..] -100

Esc

OK

Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as an auxiliary

value or a formula.

The equivalence point range always refers to the titration curve, in other

words it is independent of the evaluation procedure.

Tendency

As a further aid in recognition of the equivalence point, you can define the

tendency, namely in what part of the titration curve – descending or

ascending – the equivalence point should be located (see diagram).

– Use <F4> to select the tendency: "None", "Positive" or "Negative".

Example illustrating selection of a range and positive tendency. Equivalence points

which lie outside this range and which do not have the right tendency are ignored.

Notice: A positive mV change means a negative pH change!

E [mV]

Limit A = +200

Limit B = +100

EQP

Tendenz: Tendency: positive

0

V [mL]


Method

EQP titration: Termination

3.3.6.6 Termination

You can define how a titration should be terminated by selection of five different parameters.

The titrator can terminate the titration either

• when the first of the selected conditions is met, or

• when all the selected conditions are met.

• An exception is the maximum volume: when this is reached, the titration is immediately

terminated!

at maximum volume [mL] 10.0

at potential

No

at slope

No

after number EQPs

No

comb. termination conditions No

Maximum volume You must enter the maximum volume. It is intended as a safety precaution:

if the titration is faulty, an excessive amount of titrant is not dispensed

unnecessarily as the titration is always terminated.

Potential

The titrator terminates the titration at the defined potential.


again:

At potential

METHOD

Potential [mV,pH,..] 0.0

Esc

OK


value or a formula.

Slope

The titrator terminates the titration when the slope of the titration curve is

less than a certain value. The measured slope must exceed this absolute

value once and drop below it twice to terminate the titration.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the slope [mV,

pH,.../mL] in the mask that appears.


EQP titration: Evaluation

Method

Number EQPs

Comb. terminatetion

criteria

The titrator terminates the titration after a certain number n of equivalence

points has been found.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the number in

the mask that appears.

The titrator does not terminate the titration until all defined termination

conditions are met (exception: maximum volume, see above).

– Select "Yes" with <F4>.

3.3.6.7 Evaluation

You determine which evaluation procedure is used to calculate the equivalence points found

and select potential values you wish to have evaluated.

Procedure

Potential 1

Potential 2

Stop for reevaluation

Standard

No

No

No

Procedure

Use <F4> to select the procedure among several calculation modes

which matches the titration curve (see Section 8.3).

Standard Evaluation procedure for all S-shaped titration curves

Minimum Determination of the minimum of a titration curve

Maximum Determination of the maximum of a titration curve

Segmented Evaluation procedure for titration curves with segments

(segmented curve)

Asymmetric Evaluation procedure for S-shaped, highly asymmetric

titration curves.

Note: If an evaluation is not possible with the standard procedure, the

equivalence point is calculated by interpolation (see Section 8.3.1).

If an evaluation is not possible with the asymmetric procedure, the

equivalence point is calculated by the standard procedure or by

interpolation (see Section 8.3.4).

In both cases, the evaluation procedure will be documented for

each sample in the “raw results” report if it differs from the defined

procedure. If you have to work according to GLP guidelines, you

should therefore always record the raw results (see Section

3.3.16).


Method

EQP titration: Evaluation

Potential 1

Potential 2

In the selection of potentials, the titrator evaluates not only the equivalence

points, but also the titrant consumption in mmol or mL required for

attainment of these potential values (see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the first potential

[mV, pH,...] in the mask that appears.

Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as an

auxiliary value or a formula (see Section 2.5: Auxiliary values).

If you wish to have a second potential evaluated, proceed as described

for potential 1.

Notes for Potential 1/2

1. If you have selected potential 1 and/or 2, the titrator does not test all

termination conditions– except maximum volume – until the potentials

are reached (see Section 3.3.6.6).

2. When you select the two potentials, you also define the tendency

(from P1 to P2) and the order: If the titrator finds P2 first, it will no longer

search for P1.

Stop for

reevaluation

The EQP titration function is interrupted immediately before its completion

if the termination conditions and the condition defined here are met.

This allows you to modify parameters of the equivalence point recognition

(all) and the evaluation (potential 1 and 2). All evaluations are performed

again using the modified parameters (see Section 5.2.2).


again:

Reevaluation

METHOD

Condition

neq=0

Esc Symbol Modify OK

The condition "neq = 0" means that the EQP titration function is interrupted

immediately before its completion if no equivalence point has been

found.


Method

Stop for

reevaluation

Modify

Use <F4> to select a different condition in the list that appears:

neq > 1: If more than one,

neq < 2: less than two, or

3 > neq > 0: one or two equivalence points are found,

the titration will always be interrupted.

Symbol

Press <F3> to show the list of symbols (see Section 8.1). You can select

symbols from this list to define your own condition, e.g. VEQ > 0.6:

- Select "neq > 1" (under "Modify" command)

- delete "neq"

- select "VEQ" from the symbol list

- then position cursor on "1" and replace by "0.6".


Method

EP titration

3.3.7 EP titration (end point titration)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an end point titration and thus titrate to a particular

value of the selected measurement unit.

NOTICE

Before an end point titration to a particular pH value, you should calibrate the pH

electrode used!

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

End point

Tendency

Termination

The titrator determines several measured values and volumes as raw results (see Section 8.1:

List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measure function).

Note: If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature

of the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this

function. If you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the

temperature entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is

temperature-corrected by this measured or entered value and incorporated in the

calculation of the pH value.



Titrant

NaOH


Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor







EP titration: Predispensing

Method

Unit of measurement

The defined unit of measurement is entered automatically.

When you select the unit from the selection menu, you should select mV

or the unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an error



Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one or two predispensing modes


Predispensing

METHOD

to volume


No

Esc Modify

Volume

Factor x

sample size

No

You dispense to a specified volume [mL] that you can enter when you





the sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor if you

press <F4>.



In the subsequent continuous titrant addition, the titrator dispenses the volume in one step. It

acquires the potential values ET1 and ET2 (see Section 3.3.6.2).

In the subsequent dynamic titrant addition, it dispenses the volume in three steps (4/ 7, 2/ 7,

1/ 7 of the defined volume), which allows optimum calculation of the addition increment. It

acquires the potential values ET1 and ET2.


Method

EP titration: Titrant addition


You can select a dynamic or continuous addition mode:

Titrant addition

METHOD

Dynamic

Continuous

Esc Info Modify

Press <F3> for general information on what addition mode you should select:

• In general, select the dynamic addition mode for acid/base titrations in aqueous media,

argentometric and redox titrations,

• the continuous mode for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media.

Dynamic

For dynamic titrant addition in the EP titration, the same conditions apply

as in dynamic addition in the EQP titration (see Section 3.3.6.3). The

measured values are acquired with equilibrium control as in the EQP

titration (see Section 3.3.6.4).

∆E(set) [mV] 8.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.02

∆V(max) [mL] 0.15

∆E [mV] 1.0

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 2.0

t(max) [s] 10.0

dynamic

titrant addition

equilibrium

controlled

measured value

acquisition

Help (titrant addition)

If you have selected the first three parameters and press <F3>, you can

adopt suggested values for the dynamic addition from the mask that

appears.

• For steep titration curves, a smaller value of ∆E must be selected than

for flat titration curves.

• For titration curves that exhibit a sudden jump, small values for ∆E and

∆V(max) should be selected.

In the absence of predispensing, the titrator dispenses the first two

volume increments with ∆V(min).


EP titration: Titrant addition

Method

Dynamic

Help (measured value acquisition)

If you have selected one of the last four parameters and press <F3>, you

can adopt suggested values for the equilibrium condition from the mask

that appears:

• Fast titrations are, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous media,

• slow titrations are, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media.

The equilibrium conditions apply only in the end point range defined by

the following formula:

EP range = EP ± {1.5 * ∆E(set)}.

Example: If the end point is -30 mV, the condition holds for above values

of -15 to -45 mV.

Outside this range: ∆E (outside) = 4 * ∆E holds.

If the end point is reached: ∆E = ∆E/2 holds.

Continuous

Continuous

Control band [mV, pH,...] 100.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.01

METHOD

Esc Help OK

The titrator dispenses the titrant slowly at the start then at the maximum

rate until the defined control band. Within the control range, the dispensing

rate decreases exponentially. In the vicinity of the end point, the

titrator adds the increment ∆V(min) (the smallest increment that the

titrator can dispense is 1/5 000 of the burette volume).

E [mV, pH]

Start of the control range

+200

+100

4

5

6

Control band = 250 mV

0 7

(4.3 pH)

8

-100 End point

V [mL]


Method

EP titration: End point

Continuous

Help

When you press <F3> you can adopt suggested values for the continuous

addition from the mask that appears (confirm with OK).

• For titration curves with a steep control range, the control band must be

larger than that for the flat control range.

For ∆V(min) you can enter a formula instead of a number.

The titrator measures the initial potential ET1 after 1 - 3 seconds and for

the table of measured values it acquires a measured value every 5

seconds.

3.3.7.4 End point

You have a choice between two end point titrations.

End point

METHOD

EP absolute

EP relative

Esc Modify

EP absolute

EP relative

The absolute end point is the value on the electrode signal scale referred

to zero.

– Press <F4> and enter the potential [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that

appears.

Instead of a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential stored

as an auxiliary value.

Example: You have stored the value of "EPOT" of H 3 PO 4 for the 1st

equivalence point as H4. If you wish to titrate to this potential,

enter H4.

The relative end point is the difference between the electrode signal at the

start of the titration and that at the end.

– Press <F4> and enter the potential [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that

appears.


EP titration: Tendency/Termination

Method

3.3.7.5 Tendency

A titration exhibits a positive or negative mV or pH change (see diagram). You have to define

this.

– Press <F4> and select "Positive" or "Negative" in the mask that appears (press <F4>).

NOTICE

A positive mV change means a negative pH change!

E [mV – pH]

+ 300

+ 200

+ 100

3

4

5

6

Start potential

Tendency positive (mV)

negative (pH)

Tendency negative (mV)

positive (pH)

EP relative = 310 mV (pH 5.2)

0

7

End potential

8

EP absolute = - 30 mV (pH 7.5)

V [mL]

3.3.7.6 Termination

You define the termination of a titration by selecting two parameters.

Termination

METHOD

Maximum volume [mL] 10.0

Delay [s] 10

Esc

OK

Maximum volume You must define the volume. It is intended as a safety precaution: if the

titration is faulty, an excess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

Delay

is the time from attainment of the end point up to definitive termination of

the titration. If the measured value of the end point decreases within the

specified time, the titrator adds additional increments.


Method

Learn titration

3.3.8 Learn titration

If you are not sure what parameters you should enter for the titration function, select the

standard method Learn titration and define the parameters for the titrant and sensor under the

Learn titration function.

Note: The titrator always titrates the entire volume of the burette used. You thus have to select

weight/volume of your sample in accordance with the burette volume.

Learn titration

METHOD

Titrant/Sensor

Esc Modify OK


Titrant

NaOH


Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor

Unit of measurement








unit defined in the Setup menu. Otherwise you will receive an error


When you start the method, the titrator executes one function after another. As soon as it has

completed the Learn titration function, it calculates the parameters from the response

behavior of the sensor, the shape of the titration curve and with consideration of the burette

volume.

It stores these as an EQP titration function and sends the data to the printer. While the data

are being printed, the titrator executes the remaining functions: The "Learn titration" has given

rise to an equivalence point titration!


Learn titration

Method

Printout of a learned EQP titration (example: acid determination with NaOH)

LEARN TITRATION

Method 12 Learn titration

Version 28-Oct-1996 14:36

EQP titration

Titrant/Sensor

Titrant ............................... NaOH

Concentration [mol/L] ................. 0.1

Sensor ................................ DG111

Unit of meas. ......................... pH

Predispensing ............................. to volume

Volume [mL] ........................... 1.0

Wait time [s] ......................... 0

Titrant addition .......................... Dynamic

∆E(set) [mV] .......................... 12.0

∆V(min) [mL] .......................... 0.08

∆V(max [mL] ........................... 0.4

Measure mode .............................. Equilibrium controlled

∆E [mV] ............................... 1.0

∆t [s] ............................... 1.0

t(min) [s] ............................ 2.0

t(max) [s] ............................ 20.0

Recognition

Threshold ............................. 2.0

Steepest jump only .................... No

Range ............................... No

Tendency .............................. None

Termination

at maximum volume [mL] ................ 10.0

at potential .......................... No

at slope .............................. No

after number EQPs ..................... Yes

n = ................................ 1

comb. termination conditions .......... No

Evaluation

Procedure ............................. Standard

Potential 1 ........................... No

Potential 2 ........................... No

Stop for reevaluation ................. No

• If the titrator finds more than one equivalence point, it calculates the parameters for the one

with the steepest jump.

• If the titrator does not find any equivalence points, it interrupts the method and an error

message appears (see Section 5.2.2).

• The titrator first recognizes a possible equivalence point when this lies at the sixth measured

point (see Section 3.3.6.5).

• As an EQP titration emerges immediately from the Learn titration function, you can titrate a

series of samples with the same content. If you have selected "Statistics" under the Calculation

function, the result of the first sample will then be discarded!


Method


3.3.9 EQP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Here you define the control and evaluation of a voltametric or amperometric equivalence point

titration. The equivalence point is that point at which exactly the same number of equivalents

of titrant and analyte have reacted. In most cases, it is virtually identical to the inflection point

of the titration curve. This inflection point is recognized and the equivalence point calculated.

Titrant/Sensor

Indication

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation





Titrant/Sensor

METHOD

Titrant 1 / 2 I 2


Sensor

DM142

Esc Modify OK

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor







EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication

Method

3.3.9.2 Indication

To select the voltametric or amperometric indication, press <F4>:

Indication

METHOD

Voltametric

Amperometric

Esc Modify

Voltametric

The potential difference between two metal electrodes is measured by

polarizing them with a constant current (in the case of the DM142 electrode,

the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the current Ipol. Its value depends among other

things on:

• the electrode itself (e.g. distance between the platinum pins in the

case of the DM142 electrode)

• the dissolved substance to be determined and its concentration

• the solvent

• the reaction with the titrant.

You can obtain an initial starting point for the current intensity to be

selected by measuring the corresponding solutions with different current

intensities (see Section 6.1.4) and recording the voltage value. This

should lie within the measurement range ±1500 mV for both the initial

and the equivalence point potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

E [mV]

Example of a vitamin C determination in a multivitamin drink

with DPI [0.01 mol/L]

V [mL]


Method

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication

Amperometric


polarizing them with a constant voltage (in the case of the DM142 electrode,


– Press <F4> to enter the voltage Upol. Its value depends on the same

factors mentioned under the parameter "Voltametric".

You can obtain an initial starting point for the voltage to be selected by

measuring the corresponding solutions with different voltage values (see

Section 6.1.4) and recording the current intensity. This should lie within

the measurement range ±150 µA for both the initial and the equivalence

point potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

E [µA]

Example of a vitamin C determination in a multivitamin drink

with DPI [0.01 mol/L]

V [mL]

Note: Higher current or voltage values result in higher jumps (a steeper curve) in the equivalence

point region, however the platinum pins of the electrode become contaminated

quicker.


EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Predispensing/Titrant addition

Method


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of two predispensing modes


Predispensing

METHOD

to ∆E volume ~ ∆E(set)


No

Esc

Change

Volume

Factor x

sample size

No







you press <F4>.



In predispensing to volumes or (sample size x factor), the titrator adds the titrant in three steps

(4/7, 2/7, 1/7 of the defined volume).


You can enter only a constant increment for the volume (see Section 3.3.6.3: Incremental

titrant addition):

Titrant addition

METHOD

∆V [mL] 0.05

Esc

OK


Method

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Measure mode


You select the equilibrium controlled or timed increment measured value acquisition:

Measure mode

METHOD

Equilibrium controlled

Timed increment

Esc Modify

These parameters are used to define the wait time up to measured value acquisition following

an incremental addition. In the equilibrium controlled measure mode, the wait time is variable,

in the timed increment it is constant. You can not decide the optimum measure mode for your

method until you know the reaction time of the components and the response time of the sensor

used.

Equilibrium

controlled

∆E [mV, µA] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 3.0

t(max) [s] 30.0

Before the titrator adds the next increment, an equilibrium must be

established in the solution; the measured value must stabilize.

The following are responsible for the equilibrium

• the potential change ∆E measured in the solution

within the defined time ∆t.

The wait time up to the next increment addition also depends on the

definition of the

• minimum time t(min) and

the maximum time t(max)

As soon as the potential change of the solution is less than the defined

equilibrium (∆E/∆t), the titrator acquires the measured value and adds the

next increment.

This can be at t(min) at the earliest and should be at t(max) at the latest.

At t(max) the measured value is in any case acquired, even if the equilibrium

condition is not yet met (see diagram in Section 3.3.6.4).

This measure mode results in fast increment addition in the flat part of the

titration curve and slow addition in the steep part.


EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Recognition

Method

Timed increment

After every increment addition, the titrator allows the time you have

defined to elapse before it acquires the measured value (see diagram in

Section 3.3.6.4).

Timed increment

METHOD

∆t [s] 3.0

Esc

OK

For both measure modes, the titrator acquires the potential, the time and the titrant volume.

You can print out these measured values after the titration of a sample (see Section 3.3.16:

Report).

3.3.9.6 Recognition

Recognition of the equivalence point of a titration curve depends on the type of reaction of the

components and hence on the evaluation procedure (see Section 3.3.9.8):

1. With the evaluation procedures Maximum and Minimum, an equivalence point is recognized

when the greatest (smallest) potential value of the titration curve is greater (less) than


2. With the evaluation procedures Standard and Asymmetric an equivalence point is recognized

when the maximum of the absolute values of the 1st derivative of the titration curve

is greater than two preceding and two subsequent values.

3. With the evaluation procedure Segmented, an equivalence point is recognized when the

maximum of the absolute values of the 2nd derivative of the titration curve is greater than


Note: For the first recognition of a possible equivalence point, the titrator needs a certain number

of measured points (see Section 3.3.6.5).

You must or can support the equivalence point recognition using four parameters:

Threshold 10.0


Range

No

Tendency

None


Method

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Recognition

Threshold

To ensure that minor disturbances in the curve profile are not recognized

as equivalence points, you must determine a threshold value:

+/-E, ∆E/∆V oder ∆ 2 E/∆V 2 . This must be exceeded.

Notes

1. The threshold value should be maximum half as large as the expected

maximum value of the first or second derivative at the equivalence

point.

2. The threshold value depends on so many factors (solvent, concentration,

sensor, type of reaction, etc.) that you can not define the "correct"

threshold value until you have performed the first titration.

3. You will find examples of the threshold value for the different evaluation

procedures in Section 3.3.6.5.

Steepest jump

only

Range

You can also select this parameter for recognition of the equivalence

point (press <F4>): The titrator then recognizes only the steepest jump of

the titration curve.

You can also define a potential range for recognition of the equivalence

point. Equivalence points which lie outside this range are not recognized.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears and then press <F4>

again:

Range

METHOD

Limit A [mV, µA] 100

Limit B [mV, µA] 200

Esc

OK


value or a formula.

The equivalence point range always refers to the titration curve, in other

words it is independent of the evaluation procedure.

Tendency

As a further aid in recognition of the equivalence point, you can define the

tendency, namely in what part of the titration curve – descending or

ascending – the equivalence point should be located (see diagram on

page 3-32).

– Use <F4> to select the tendency: "None", "Positive" or "Negative".


EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Termination

Method

3.3.9.7 Termination

You can define how a titration should be terminated by selection of five different parameters.

The titrator can terminate the titration either

• when the first of the selected conditions is met, or

• when all the selected conditions are met.

• An exception is the maximum volume: when this is reached, the titration is immediately

terminated!

at maximum volume [mL] 10.0

at potential

No

at slope

No

after number EQPs

No

comb. termination conditions No

Maximum volume You must enter the maximum volume. It is intended as a safety precaution:

if the titration is faulty, an excessive amount of titrant is not dispensed

unnecessarily as the titration is always terminated.

Potential

The titrator terminates the titration at the defined potential.


again:

At potential

METHOD

Potential [mV, µA] 0.0

Esc

OK


value or a formula.

Slope

The titrator terminates the titration when the slope of the titration curve is

less than a certain value. The measured slope must exceed this absolute

value once and drop below it twice to terminate the titration.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the slope

[mV/mL] or [µA/mL] in the mask that appears.


Method

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Evaluation

Number EQPs

Comb. termination

criteria

The titrator terminates the titration after a certain number n of equivalence

points has been found.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the number in

the mask that appears.

The titrator does not terminate the titration until all defined termination

conditions are met (exception: maximum volume, see above).

– Select "Yes" with <F4>.

3.3.9.8 Evaluation

You determine which evaluation procedure is used to calculate the equivalence points found

and select potential values you wish to have evaluated.

Procedure

Potential 1

Potential 2

Stop for reevaluation

Standard

No

No

No

Procedure

Use <F4> to select the procedure among several calculation modes

which matches the titration curve (see Section 8.3).

Standard Evaluation procedure for all S-shaped titration curves;

can be used for curves with steep jumps in titrations with

voltametric and amperometric indication.

Minimum Determination of the minimum of a titration curve

Maximum Determination of the maximum of a titration curve

Segmented Evaluation procedure for titration curves with segments

(segmented curve); can be used for titrations with amperometric

indication.

Asymmetric Evaluation procedure for S-shaped, highly asymmetric

titration curves.



Method

Procedure

Notes

1. In an evaluation with the standard procedure is not possible, the

equivalence point is calculated by interpolation (see Section 8.3.1).

If an evaluation is not possible with the asymmetric procedure, the

equivalence point is calculated by the standard procedure or by

interpolation (see Section 8.3.4).

In both cases, the evaluation procedure will be documented for each

sample in the "raw results" report if it differs from the defined procedure.

If you have to work according to GLP guidelines, you should

therefore always record the raw results (see Section 3.3.16).

2. If you determine the same sample with a voltametric and amperometric

EQP titration, in many cases you must change not only the

parameters of the indication, measured value acquisition and recognition,

but also the evaluation procedure. An example is the vitamin C

determination in a multivitamin drink with DPI [0.01mol/L]:

Voltametric titration: Standard

Amperometric titration: Segmented

E [mV]

E [µA]

E-V curve

E-V curve

∆E/∆V-V curve

∆E/∆V-V curve

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 -V curve

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 -V curve

V [mL]

V [mL]


Method


Procedure

3.If you obtain a so-called Z curve in an equivalence point determination

(see diagram), we recommend performing an end point titration.

E [mV]

Example of a titer determination of iodine solution [0.1 mol/L]

with L-ascorbic acid (vitamin C)

V [mL]

Potential 1

Potential 2

In the selection of potentials, the titrator evaluates not only the equivalence

points, but also the titrant consumption in mmol or mL required for

attainment of these potential values (see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the first potential

[mV, µA] in the mask that appears.

Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as an

auxiliary value or a formula (see Section 2.5: Auxiliary values).

If you wish to have a second potential evaluated, proceed as described

for potential 1.

Notes for Potential 1/2

1. If you have selected potential 1 and/or 2, the titrator does not test all

termination conditions– except maximum volume – until the potentials

are reached (see Section 3.3.9.7).

2. When you select the two potentials, you also define the tendency

(from P1 to P2) and the order: If the titrator finds P2 first, it will no

longer search for P1.

Stop for

reevaluation

The EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function is interrupted immediately before

its completion if the termination conditions and the condition defined here

are met (see Section 3.3.6.7).


EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Method

3.3.10 EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an end point titration with voltametric or amperometric

indication.

Titrant/Sensor

Indication

Predispensing

Titrant addition

End point

Tendency

Termination





Titrant/Sensor

METHOD

Titrant 1 / 2 I 2


Sensor

DM142

Esc Modify OK

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor







Method

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication

3.3.10.2 Indication

Press <F4> to select the voltametric or amperometric titration :

Indication

METHOD

Voltametric

Amperometric

Esc Modify

Voltametric


polarizing them with a constant current (in the case of the DM142

electrode, the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the current Ipol. Its value depends among other

things on:

• the electrode itself (e.g. distance between the platinum pins in the

case of the DM142 electrode)

• the dissolved substance to be determined and its concentration

• the solvent

• the reaction with the titrant.

You can obtain an initial starting point for the current intensity to be

selected by measuring the corresponding solutions with different current

intensities (see Section 6.1.4) and recording the voltage value. This

should lie within the measurement range ±1500 mV for both the initial

and the end point potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

E [mV]

Example of a Karl Fischer titration with Hydranal

(2-component system)

V [mL]


EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication

Method

Amperometric


polarizing them with a constant voltage (in the case of the DM142 electrode,


– Press <F4> to enter the voltage Upol. Its value depends on the same

factors mentioned under the parameter "Voltametric".

You can obtain an initial starting point for the voltage to be selected by

measuring the corresponding solutions with different voltage values (see

Section 6.1.4) and recording the current intensity. This should lie within

the measurement range ±150 µA for both the initial and the end point

potential (see Setion 12.1: Technical Data).

E [µA]

Example of a Karl Fischer titration with Hydranal

(2-component system)

V [mL]


Method

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Predispensing


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one or two predispensing modes


Predispensing

METHOD

to volume


No

Esc Modify

Volume

Factor x

sample size

No

You dispense to a specified volume [mL] that you can enter when you





the sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor if you

press <F4>.

You can also enter a wait time (see "Volume").


With the predispensing, the titrator dispenses the volume in one step.


EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Titrant addition/End point

Method


The addition can only be continuous (see Section 3.3.7.3: Continuous titrant addition):

Titrant addition

METHOD

Control band [mV, µA] 500.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.01

Esc

OK

The titrator dispenses the titrant slowly at the start then at the maximum

rate until the defined control band. Within the control range, the dispensing

rate decreases exponentially. In the vicinity of the end point, the

titrator adds the increment ∆V(min) (see diagram in Section 3.3.7.3); the

smallest increment that the titrator can dispense is 1/5 000 of the burette

volume.

For ∆V(min) you can enter a formula instead of a number.

The titrator measures the initial potential ET1 after 1 - 3 seconds and for

the table of measured values it acquires a measured value every 5

seconds. The titrator can store maximum 300 measured values. If this

limit is exceeded, it reduces the number of measured values by half by

leaving only every second measured value in the memory. The new

measured values continue to be acquired every 5 seconds.

Note: The control band determines the control and the speed of the end point titration. To enter

a "reasonable" value, you should perform an equivalence point titration with timedincrement

measured value acquisition. Using the table of measured values of this

titration, you can determine both the end point potential and the control band exactly.

3.3.10.5 End point

You enter the end point for the titration.

End point

METHOD

Potential [mV, µA] 100.0

Esc

OK

Instead of a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential stored

as an auxiliary value.


Method

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Tendency/Termination

3.3.10.6 Tendency

A titration exhibits a positive or negative mV or µA change. You have to define this.

Tendency

METHOD

Tendency

Negative

Esc Modify OK

Note: The tendency of a voltametric titration with a positive current intensity is negative, with

a negative current intensity it is positive. The tendency of an amperometric titration with

a positive voltage is positive, with a negative voltage it is negative.

3.3.10.7 Termination

You define the termination of a titration by selecting two resp. three parameters.

Termination

Maximum volume [mL] 10.0

Delay [s]

Yes

Maximum time [s] No

Esc

METHOD

OK

Maximum volume You must define the volume. It is intended as a safety precaution: if the

titration is faulty, an excess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

Delay

Maximum time

is the time from attainment of the end point up to definitive termination of

the titration. If the measured value of the end point decreases within the

specified time, the titrator adds additional increments.

Instead of or in addition to the delay time, you can also enter a time when

the titration should be stopped.

Enter a maximum time when, e.g. you perform a stating (see METTLER

method 90016: Drift determination for KF titrations).

If you define a value for both termination parameters, the titration will be

terminated when one of the two values is reached.

Note: If the titration is terminated because the maximum time has been

reached, no end point will be calculated. VEND (VEX) is recorded

as the raw result.


pH/mV-stat

Method

3.3.11 pH/mV-stat

With the aid of this function you can perform a pH-stating. You determine the parameters which

assure the constancy of a potential value, which lead to termination of the pH-stating and which

are used for the evaluation.

Titrant/Sensor

Pretitration

End point

Tendency

Termination

Storage interval

Evaluation

The titrator determines the following raw results (see also 8.1: List of symbols):

• the titrant consumption in mL or mmol up to termination of the pH-stating.

• the titrant consumption in mL or mmol up to attainment of defined time limits.

• the mean titrant consumption in mL/min or mmol/min within the defined time limits.

• the correlation coefficient CSTAT, which results from calculation of the mean titrant

consumption through linear regression.

Notes

1. If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature of

the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this function. If

you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the temperature

entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is temperature-corrected

by this measured or entered value and incorporated in the calculation of the pH value.

2. In the recording of a titration curve, you obtain only the actual pH-stating. You can follow

the graphical plot of the pretitration only on the display.

Titrant/Sensor

To modify the titrant or the sensor, press <F4>:

Titrant

NaOH


Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV


Method

pH/mV-stat

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor

Unit of measurement








unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an error message

when the method is started.

Pretitration

Select the pretitration if the potential value of your solution differs from the value you need for

the pH-stating:

– Press <F4> and select "Yes" in the mask that appears.

– Press <F4> and enter the control band [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that appears (see Section

3.3.7.3: EP titration, Titrant addition).

End point

End point

Potential [mV, pH,...] 8

Control band [mV, pH,...] 0.7

METHOD

Esc

OK

Potential

Control band

The value you enter here is kept constant during the pH-stating. Instead

of a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential stored as an

auxiliary value (see example in Section 3.3.7.4).

The defined value controls the end point range: The lower the value, the

faster the titrator reacts to a deviation from the potential of the defined end

point.

Help

You can accept suggested values for the value of the control band: Press

<F3> and confirm a value in the mask that appears with OK.

• For pH-statings whose end point lies in a steep control range, the

control band must be larger than for statings whose end point lies in a

flat control range.


pH/mV-stat

Method

Tendency

The tendency you have to define refers to the titrant which is added. The kinetics of the reaction

determined by pH-stating are always in the opposite direction!

– Press <F4> and select "Positive" or "Negative" in the mask that appears.

Termination

You define the termination of the pH-stating by the following parameters:

Maximum volume [mL] 10

t(min) [s] 60

t(max) [s] 600

Minimum consumption [mL] 0.1

Time span [s] 10

Maximum volume The entry is intended as a safety precaution: if the titration is faulty, an

excess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

t(min)

t(max)

is the earliest time a termination can take place; it depends on the

minimum consumption within the defined time range.

is the time when the pH-stating should be terminated.

Min. consumption The stating is terminated when not more than 0.1 mL titrant are consumed

Time span within 10 seconds (example of default parameters).

This condition can be effective at the earliest after 60 seconds [t(min)].

After 600 seconds [t(max)], the stating is terminated even if the condition

is not met.

Storage interval

You define a time interval for storage of the measurement data.

– Press <F4> and enter the interval in the mask that appears.

With the default value, the current measured value and the associated volume are stored after

10 s.

The titrator can store and print out maximum 300 measured values. If the defined interval is

too small, after 300 measured values the titrator first eliminates the values of the pretitration.

If the limit of 300 measured values is then again exceeded, it reduces their number by half by

leaving only every second measured value in the memory. The measured values continue to

be stored at the defined interval.


Method

pH/mV-stat

Evaluation

The following parameters define the evaluation of the pH-stating:

Evaluation

METHOD

Time limit t1 [s] 100.0

Time limit t2 [s] 200.0

Esc

OK

Time limit t1

Time limit t2

The titrant consumption is calculated up to the defined times t1 and t2

(see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

The time limits are not restricted to the values t1 and t2 entered here. In

one of the additional Calculation functions, you can calculate, e.g.

• the mean titrant consumption within different time limits with

R = QSTAT (100, 200).

• the titrant consumption up to a different time limit with

R = VT (200).

• the correlation coefficient within a different time limit with

R = CSTAT (300, 600).

In this manner you can also define additional results with new time limits

following a pH-stating (see Section 6.5.3: Perform calculations).

Example of the progress of a pH-stating with time

∆V/∆t [mL/s]

3

1: Pretitration

2: When the end point is reached, the titrator

waits 5 s before sending an audio signal and

the message "Pretitration complete: Please

add sample!". The titrator continues to exert

control and stir.

3: You enter your sample and confirm the

message with OK: The titration starts. If you

have to remove the titration vessel for addition,

you can stop the stirrer during this time

(see Section 6.2)

4: The termination condition of ∆V/∆t is met,

the pH-stating is terminated.

2

1

t(min)

t(max)

4

t [s]


Calculation

Method

3.3.12 Calculation

You can use this function to calculate one result R for every sample.

Formula

R=Q*C/m

Constant

C=M/(10*z)

Decimal places 3

Result unit %

Result name

Statistics

No

Formula

Constant

Press <F4> to open the "List of formulas" and select a different formula

or enter the one you need for your calculation (see also Section 8.4:

Examples of formulas).

Press <F4> to open the "List of constants" and select a different constant

or enter the one you need for your calculation.

Symbol

You can select the symbols you need for your calculation from the list that

appears by pressing <F3>. It contains all symbols possible for the

individual functions (see also Section 8.1: List of symbols).

You can link together all available parameters and numeric values.

Example illustrating the entry of the formula "R=QSTAT(120,180)":

- Press <F4> and accept "R=VSTAT(100,200)",

- position the cursor on "V", delete it and select "Q" from the list,

- replace "100" by "120",

- skip the comma with the cursor and

- replace "200" by "180".

The following operations are available for calculations:

on the keypad

in "List of formulas"

• Addition: + • Logarithmic function to base 10: lg(x)

• Subtraction: – • Logarithmic function to base e: ln(x)

• Multiplication: * • Exponential function to base 10: pw(x)

• Division: / • Exponential function to base e: ex(x)

• Squaring function:

sq(x)

• Square root function:

sr(x)


Method

Calculation

Decimal places

Result unit

Result name

Statistics

Enter the number of decimal places you require in the result.

Press <F4> to select the unit from the selection menu.

You can enter the name with an attached keyboard.

Use <F4> to select whether a statistical calculation should be performed.

"Yes": in the analysis of a sample series the mean value x, the standard

deviation s and the relative standard deviation srel are calculated and

recorded.

Notes

1. Some standard methods include three Calculation functions. If you need only one result,

delete the formula "Rn = ..." with CE. This skips the function when the method is processed.

2. For the calculation of a titration

curve with 3 equivalence points

(acidic mixture of 3 substances),

you must define the parameters

of the three Calculation functions.

E

R3

R2

R1

Q1

Q2

Q3

V

Formula Constant Unit

1st Calculation function: R1 = Q1∗ C1 / m C1 = M / (10 ∗ z) [%]

2nd Calculation function: R2 = Q2 ∗ C2 / m C2 = (60.01 ∗ 1000) / 1 [ppm]

3rd Calculation function: R3 = Q3 ∗ C3 / m C3 = 53.5 / 1 [mg/g]

Another example is the METTLER method 90001: In addition to the NaOH consumption in

mL as a result, the acid content of HCl in mol/L and in g/L are calculated.

3. R and C are indexed according to the preset sequence. If you delete, e.g. the formula

"R2 =...", 3 remains as the index for the third calculation if you do not change it yourself (see

Section 8.2: Use of indices).


Calculation

Method

4. You must enter the molar mass M and the equivalent number z of the 2nd and 3rd

Calculation function as numeric values or insert as Hj if you have stored them as auxiliary

values (see Section 2.5): M and z are defined in the Sample function for the calculation

of the first equivalence point (see Section 3.3.2).

5. If you do not know the number of equivalence points, you can have Q recognized by a

condition instead of defining indices for Q (see "List of formulas").

Example: R = Q (200 < EPOT < 300) means that the Q used for the calculation is that whose

equivalence point potential lies between 200 and 300 mV. If the titrator detects more than

one equivalence point in this range, it calculates the first (see also Section 8.4.3).

6. The titrator checks your entries when you quit the parameter mask with OK. If you have

entered wrong formulas or constants, you immediately receive an appropriate error

message, e.g.

Error No. 3

Wrong formula

Modify

Terminate

METHOD

OK

Modify: You can change the entry.

Terminate: The entry last stored reappears.

If you have used raw results (e.g. R = QDISP) which the titrator can not determine as the

method does not include the Dispense function, you do not receive an error message until

the method is stored.

7. The titrator stores results until you start a new sample series or switch off the titrator (see

also Section 8.5.6).

8. If you abort the method with Reset, an evaluation of the data obtained to date follows. If

you were to abort the titration sequence (see point 2), e.g. shortly before the second

equivalence point, you would receive result R1 but not R2 and R3 (see Section 5.2.4).

9. Under the auxiliary function Results, you can

• perform additional calculations after the titration of a sample (see Section 6.5.3)

• eliminate results (outliers) on completion of a sample series and thus modify the statistical

evaluation (see Section 6.5.5).


Method

Calibration

3.3.13 Calibration

You can use this function to calibrate an electrode: its zero point and its slope are calculated.

You determine the buffers which you use for calibration of the sensor. The potential of the

buffer solutions is acquired using the Measure function (see example in the Quick Guide).

Notes

1. As the slope of an electrode depends on the temperature, it is important to incorporate the

temperature in the calibration.

• Before the Measure function, the temperature of the buffer solution is measured

automatically if you have attached a temperature sensor; otherwise, the temperature you

entered before the start of the calibration is used (see Sample function, Sections 3.3.2

and 5.1).

If you later measure the pH value of a solution at a different temperature, the slope of the

sensor is temperature-corrected by the titrator.

2. The calibration data (zero point, slope and calibration temperature) are entered automatically

with the date in the parameter mask of the sensor (see Section 2.2.2).

3. Depending on the number of buffer solutions measured, the titrator performs the following

calibration:

• With one buffer solution, it calculates the zero point of the sensor. The slope remains

unchanged.

• With several buffer samples, it calculates the zero point and the slope of the sensor by

means of a linear regression through the measured points.

You can modify the following parameters:

Sensor

DG111

Buffer type

pH (DIN/NIST)

Result R 1

Minimum slope [mV/unit] -55.0

Maximum slope [mV/unit] -65.0

Sensor

Buffer type



Press <F4> and select the type in the mask that appears:

• pH (DIN/NIST),

• pH (MERCK),

• pH (METTLER TOLEDO) or

• pH, pM, pX.


Calibration

Method

Buffer type

The titrator has 8 values each for DIN/NIST, MERCK Titrisol and METTLER

TOLEDO buffer solutions stored which you can select to calibrate pH

electrodes. Under "pH, pM, pX (free selection)" enter values of userselected

buffer solutions to calibrate pH or ion-selective electrodes (see

Note 2).

Example illustrating selection of pH values of a MERCK buffer. Press

<F4> to display the selection menu:

pH (MERCK Titrisol)

METHOD

First buffer pH 4

Second buffer pH 4

Third buffer pH 4 ∇

Esc Modify OK

– If your first buffer solution does not have a pH value of 4, press <F4>

(otherwise, select 2nd buffer):

MERCK buffers

pH 3

pH 4

pH 5

pH 6

Esc

METHOD

OK

∇

– Select a different buffer value from this list, e.g. pH 3 and confirm with

OK.

– In the "pH (MERCK Titrisol)" mask select the 2nd buffer and again

press <F4> to select its pH value, e.g. pH 7 etc.

Notes

1. The buffer values apply to a temperature of

• 25 °C for DIN/NIST buffers

• 20 °C for MERCK Titrisol buffers

• 25 °C for METTLER TOLEDO buffers.

If you calibrate at a different temperature, these buffer values are

automatically temperature-corrected and recorded on the printout.

If you calibrate at a temperature that lies outside the defined range for

the corresponding buffer, "Temperature outside limits" appears in the

report; however, the calibration data will be recorded.


Method

Calibration

Buffer type

2. For the pH, pM, pX buffer values you can also enter formulas.

3. Positive ions result in a negative slope, negative ions in a positive

slope.

Result R

Minimum slope

Maximum slope

"1" (result index): The measured values E of the buffer solutions used are

stored under the first Calculation function: R1 = E (see Section 8.2: Use

of indices). The titrator calculates the zero point and the slope of the

electrode by linear regression by assigning the measured values to the

standard concentrations of the buffer solutions. The index must thus be

the same as under the Calculation function.

Enter the minimum and maximum slope; the slope of an electrode is a

measure of its quality.

If you obtain a slope, e.g. with the pH buffer types in a pH calibration which

lies outside the limits you have defined, the calibration data are not

entered for the corresponding sensor. The error message "Data not

transferred" appears on the report.


Titer

Method

3.3.14 Titer

Titer is an assignment function: The result R or its calculated mean value x of the titration of

a titrant is assigned to the titer by t = R or t = x and automatically entered in the parameter

mask of the titrant with the date (see Section 2.1.2 and the example in the Quick Guide).

Titer

METHOD

Titrant

NaOH


Formula t = x

Esc Modify OK

Titrant

Concentration

Formula t =




Press <F4> to select from the selection menu:

"x", if you determine the titer with more than one sample so that the

calculated mean value is assigned to the titer. The statistical calculation

must be selected in the Calculation function for this.

"R" only if you determine the titer with a single sample.

Note: If you delete, e.g. one result of these titer determinations under the auxiliary function

Results, the new calculated mean value will not be entered in the parameter mask of

the titrant!


Method

Auxiliary value

3.3.15 Auxiliary value

Auxiliary value is an assignment function. The result (R or Ri) or its calculated mean value

(x or x [k]) or a raw result of the titration function is assigned to the auxiliary value Hj and

entered automatically with the date in the parameter mask of the auxiliary value (see Section

2.5 and Section 8.2: Use of indices).

20 auxiliary value memories are available: H1 - H20.

You can store, e.g. the following as auxiliary values:

• the blank value of a titration (example of the standard method: "Blank by EQP titration")

• a raw result that you obtain under the EQP or EP titration function, e.g. "H6 = VEQ".

You can call up these auxiliary values in the Calculation function.

Auxiliary value

METHOD

ID

Formula

H20=R1

Esc

OK

ID

Formula

Enter an identification if desired.

Enter "H = R" or "Hj = Ri" if you determine the auxiliary value with a single

sample.

Enter "H = x " or "Hj = x [k]" only if you determine the auxiliary value with

more than one sample so that the calculated mean value is assigned to

the auxiliary value. The Statistics calculation must be selected in the

Calculation function for this.

You can also enter, e.g. "H (Hj) = VEND * 1.5" as a formula.

Symbol

If "Formula" is selected, you can open the list of symbols with <F3> (see

also Section 8.1). Select the symbol from this list which should be

assigned to the auxiliary value, e.g. for the formula "H6 = VEQ":

- Position the cursor on "2",

- replace "20" by "6",

- position the cursor on "R" and delete "R1",

- select "VEQ" from the symbol list.


Report

Method

3.3.16 Report

You use this function to determine what data should be recorded.

Note: If your method contains two Titration functions, e.g. standard method "2 Step titrations

(EQP)", a Report function also follows the first Titration function so that you can record,

e.g. the table of measured values and titration curve of the first function. The reason for

this is that the titrator stores only the measured values of the last Titration function.

The titrator stores the raw results of all functions up to the determination of the next

sample within a series (see Section 8.5.6).

Report

METHOD

Output Printer

Results

Yes

All results No ∇

Esc Modify OK

Output

Use <F4> to select the unit(s) or card to which the data should be sent:

• Printer,

• Memory card (not with DL50),

• Computer,

• Printer + memory card (not with DL50) or

• Printer + computer.

Printer is stored as the default parameter (for the printer you have

defined, see Section 2.7.1).

If you have not defined a printer and/or computer, the function can not be

executed. This case neither initiates an error message nor does it

influence the titration.

If you have defined and switched on a printer, but this is set to "offline",

the titrator waits until you switch the printer to "online" and then starts to

transfer its data.

If you have defined and attached a computer, but have not switched it on,

an appropriate error message appears.

If you have selected memory card but have not inserted one, an appropriate

error message appears.


Method

Report

Results

All results

Raw results

Table of measured

values

Sample data

E – V curve

∆E/∆V – V curve

log ∆E/∆V – V

curve

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 – V

curve

E – t curve

V – t curve

∆V/∆t – t curve

All results defined in the Calculation function are recorded for the current

sample after every titration. Use <F4> to select "No" if you do not want a

report.

After the last titration of a sample series, the results of all samples are

recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>. These include the statistics,

calibration, titer and auxiliary value data if the parameter or the functions

have been defined in the method.

After every titration the raw results such as VEQ or VDISP of the current

sample are recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

After every titration the table of measured values of the current sample

is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

After the last titration of a sample series the sample data of all samples

are recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4> (ID, molar mass, equivalent

number, weight/volume, correction factor).

After every titration the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the current

sample is printed out if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs

Volume of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

The ordinate representation is linear.

After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs


The ordinate representation is logarithmic.

After every titration the 2nd derivative of the titration curve Potential vs


The ordinate representation is linear.

After every titration the titration curve Potential vs Time of the current

sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

After every titration the titration curve Volume vs Time of the current

sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Volume vs

Time of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.


Sample

Contents

Page

4. Sample data memory ................................................................................ 4-3

4.1 Entering sample data ................................................................................ 4-4

4.1.1 Deleting sample data ............................................................................... 4-6

4.1.2 Printing sample data ................................................................................ 4-7

4.1.3 Modifying sample data ............................................................................. 4-7

4.1.4 Adding sample data ................................................................................. 4-8

4.1.4.1 DL50/DL53 ............................................................................................... 4-8

4.1.4.2 DL55/DL58 ............................................................................................... 4-8

4.2 Weight transfer from a balance ............................................................... 4-12

4.3 Requesting sample data from a computer ............................................. 4-13


Sample

4. Sample data memory

This menu is used for the entry and storage of sample data. You can enter weight or volume,

identification, correction factor and temperature for maximum 60 samples. The data remain

stored even if you switch off the titrator; data of analyzed samples, on the other hand, are

deleted.

The menu is always accessible during the analysis to allow the user

• to see which samples have already been titrated

• to modify or delete data of samples not yet analyzed

• to enter data for additional samples.

The performance of the four titrators differs in this menu as follows:

DL50/DL53:

DL55/DL58:

You can enter data for only one sample series.

You can enter data for three sample series; these series can be run with

the same method or with three different methods.

You can enter the data of a so-called urgent sample.

With the Run key, method(s) and sample data are called up automatically and analyzed in

succession by the titrator (see Section 5).


Sample

4.1 Entering sample data

When you press the Sample key, the (blank) sample data list appears:

No. Status Wt/vol.

Meth. ID

Add

Add

SAMPLE

New sample series

New sample series (data: computer) 1)

Esc OK

1) appears if you have defined and attached a

computer (see Section 4.3).

Sample entry

SAMPLE

Number of samples 1

Method ID 00001

User

Esc OK

Number samples Enter, e.g. 3.

Method ID

User

Enter, e.g. 00001 (example for the standard method "Equivalence point

titration", see Section 5.1): This calls up the method to be used for

analysis of the samples.

If you do not know the identification of the method, press <F4> "Modify":

The method groups appear.

– Confirm either user or METTLER methods: The list of these methods

appears.

– Confirm the method you need for the analysis.

Enter your name if a keyboard is attached to the titrator.


Sample

Note: The titrator also accepts methods stored on an inserted memory card or in an attached

computer: When you enter an identification whose method is not stored in the titrator,

the method is first searched for on the memory card and entered (not possible with the

DL50). If the method is not stored on the card, it is requested from the computer and

entered (see Operating Instructions: Computer Interface Description).

Press <F5> to show the sample data mask (weight entry as example):

Sample No. 1

SAMPLE

Sample ID

Weight [g] 0.0

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0

Correction factor f 1.0 ∇

Esc Balance* OK

* "Balance" appears if you have defined a balance in the Setup menu.

Sample ID

Enter or modify or delete if you have already defined the identification in

the Sample function (Section 3.3.2).

Weight Enter or transfer from an attached balance (see Section 4.2).

(Volume) • If you can not enter the weight or volume until during the titration, e.g.

as you do not wish to lose time through back weighing, do not enter

anything: As the titrator does not need the sample data until it starts to

calculate, the sample data mask appears again in the display during the

titration (see Section 5.1).

You can also enter the weight during the titration in the sample data

memory (see Section 5.2: Sequence of a pH-stat titration).

• If you have defined a fixed volume in the Sample function, no change

is possible.

• If you have violated the lower or upper limits of the weight/volume, but

still confirm this entry, the following appears:

Entry outside limits

SAMPLE

Modify entry

Save entry

Modify: The sample data mask reappears.

Save: The weight is transferred. The sample data mask for the next

sample or the sample data list appears.

OK


Sample

Limits

Correction factor

Temperature

You can not change the limits. These data do not appear if you have

defined a fixed volume in the Sample function.

You can enter a value for every sample that is reconciled in the

calculations if you enter f in the formula of the Calculation function.

Example: Each substance has a different, known moisture content

whose value you can insert for f:

1st sample: Moisture content = 4% → f = 0.96 → R = Q * C/(m * f)

2nd sample: Moisture content = 3% → f = 0.97 → R = Q * C/(m * f)

Enter the temperature of the solution to be titrated. You can not change

the value if you have defined a temperature sensor in the Sample function.

When you confirm the entries, the sample data mask for the second and the third sample

appears, followed by the sample data list:

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID

2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∆

3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322


4.1.1 Deleting sample data

When you press <F2>, the following appears:

Delete sample(s)

SAMPLE

Selected sample

Sample series

Esc OK

Selected sample

The sample highlighted by the selection bar when you confirmed "Delete"

is deleted.

Sample series DL50/DL53: All entered data are deleted.

DL55/DL58: All data of the sample series which contains the sample

highlighted by the selection bar when you confirmed

"Delete" are deleted.


Sample

Notes

1. You can not delete sample data of a series which are done until all defined samples have

been analyzed. When you then press <F2>, you can delete only the series.

2. If the titrator is controlled by a computer, you can not delete the sample data (see Section

6.8.3).

4.1.2 Printing sample data

A list of all sample data contained in the sample data memory is printed out.

4.1.3 Modifying sample data

The sample data mask of the selected sample appears.

• As long as the sample is ready, you can modify all parameters.

• If the sample is being titrated, in other words is active, you can modify the parameters as

long as the weight/volume of the sample has not yet been used for the calculation.

• When the sample is titrated, in other words ready, you can not modify any parameters.


Sample

4.1.4 Adding sample data

4.1.4.1 DL50/DL53

You add data of a new sample to the existing data of a sample series:

Add

SAMPLE

Sample to series 1)

Esc OK

1) If you have transferred the existing data from a computer, "Sample to series (data:

computer)" appears, see Section 4..

If the series has been processed, "New sample series" also appears.

Sample to series

The sample data mask for sample No. 4 of method 00001 appears

(example in Section 4.1.1).

As long as you do not delete the data of a series classed as done, you

can add data for a new sample to the series.

The data of a processed series are deleted when you

• switch off the titrator

• select "New sample series" in place of "Sample to series"

• modify the method used to run the series.

4.1.4.2 DL55/DL58

You either add the data of an additional sample or that of a new series to the existing data of

a series. The series are processed by the titrator in the defined sequence.

Add

SAMPLE

New sample series

New sample series (data: computer) 1)

Sample to series ∇ 1)

Esc OK

1) appears when you have defined and attached a computer (see Section 4.3). If you

have transferred existing data from the computer. "Sample to series (data: computer)"

also appears → scroll display


Sample

New sample

series

You can add maximum two additional series to an existing series.

Before the first sample series (possible only if its method has not yet

been started):


1 ready 1.36182 00001 45320

2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∇

Add

– Select the blank line above the first sample and press <F5>: The "Add"

mask appears (see above and the sequence in Section 4.1).

Between two sample series


2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∆

3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322

1 ready 5 2

2 ready 5 2 ∇

Add

– Select a sample data line of the first series and press <F5> : The "Add"

mask appears (see above and sequence in Section 4.1).

After the last sample series

– Select a sample data line of the last series and press <F5>: The "Add"

mask appears.

Sample to series

The sample data mask for sample No. 4 of method 00001 appears (example

in Section 4.1.1).

You can add samples to a completed series before the titrator starts to

process the next series, in other words before you confirm the result list

of the last sample with OK.

As soon as you have confirmed the result list of the last sample of a series,

all its data are deleted when the next series is defined. You can then enter

the data for a new sample series.


Sample

Urgent sample

If you have to analyze one sample immediately while a sample series is being processed by

the DL55/DL58, you can insert this after the active series sample. The sample series is

interrupted and then continued after the determination.

Example: The titrator is processing sample 2 of method 00001.

– Press the Sample key and select the active sample:


1 done 1.36181 00001 45320

2 active 1.23454 00001 45321

3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322

1 ready 5 2 ∇

Add

Add

SAMPLE

New sample series 1)

Sample to series

Urgent sample

Esc OK

1) appears if three series have not yet been defined.

– Confirm "Urgent sample" with OK.

Sample entry

SAMPLE

Number of samples 1

Method ID 00001

User

Esc OK

Number samples

Method ID

User

You can not modify these: You can determine only one urgent sample at

a time!

Enter the identification of the method which should be used to determine

the sample.



Sample

After entry and confirmation of the sample data, the following appears:


1 done 1.36181 00001 45320

2 active 1.23452 00001 45321

EX ready 0.41894 8

3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322 ∇


• When sample 2 is done, method 8 for the urgent sample is called up

(see Section 5.4: Running sample series).

• When the urgent sample is done, method 00001 for sample 3 is called

up. The data of the urgent sample are deleted.

Note: When a defined sample series has been analyzed and you confirm the Add command

to add a sample to the series, "Urgent sample" is also available in the mask that appears

(see previous page).


Sample

4.2 Weight transfer from a balance

If you have attached a balance to the titrator, you must have defined this in the Setup menu.

If not, "Balance" does not appear in the sample data mask.

Sample No. 1

SAMPLE

Sample ID

Weight [g] 0.0

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0

Correction factor f 1.0 ∇

Esc Balance OK

When you press <F4>, the value displayed on the balance appears, e.g.

Weight:

SAMPLE

> 1.36181

Esc OK

The weight is transferred with OK.

If the weight violates the lower limit, three minus signs (– – –) always

appear after "Weight", if it exceeds the upper limit three plus signs

(+ + +) appear. You can change or confirm the weight (see Section 4.1:

Weight parameter).

With METTLER TOLEDO balances which have a key to transfer the weight,

you can enter the weight values for a sample series from the balance

without pressing a key on the titrator. The setting "Bidirectional transmission

mode" is required for this.

Some balances show the sample number, others also show weight limits

(DeltaTrac).

– With weight "0.0" in the first sample data mask, press <F4>.

– Press the TARE key of the balance to display the current weight.

– Activate the weight transfer with the appropriate key of the balance: The

weight is entered in the sample data mask; at the same time, the titrator

automatically starts the weight entry for the next sample.


Sample

4.3 Requesting sample data from a computer

If you have loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriate program on the

attached computer, you can request the sample data stored on it. With the "Add" command,

the following appears automatically:

Add

New sample series

New sample series (data: computer)

SAMPLE

Esc OK

Series entry

SAMPLE

ID

User

Esc OK

ID

User

You enter the identification of the sample series stored in the computer.

This is transferred to the sample data memory with OK. These sample

data can only be printed out or displayed ("Modify" command).


Note: For reports which are sent to the printer, the computer and the

memory card,

• the name entered in the titrator is always adopted,

• the name entered in the computer is adopted if you do not enter

a name in the titrator.

If you wish to add the data of a new sample to a series transferred from the computer, confirm

"Sample to series (data: computer)" in the "Add" mask with OK. The sample data are added

to the sample data list.

You will find further information in the Operating Instructions for the computer interface or the

DLWin or LabX titration software.


Run

Run

Contents

Page

5. Analysis ..................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1 Menu sequence up to insertion of the sample ....................................... 5-4

5.2 Analysis sequence of a sample ............................................................... 5-7

5.2.1 Fading out analysis ..................................................................................... 5-11

5.2.2 Analysis is interrupted ................................................................................. 5-11

5.2.3 Modifying method of the current sample series .......................................... 5-12

5.2.4 Aborting analysis ......................................................................................... 5-12

5.3 DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method ................................................ 5-13

5.4 DL55/DL58: Running sample series ........................................................ 5-15


Run

Run

5. Analysis

You perform titrations with a selected method. The data required for this are stored in the

Method and Setup menus. You prepare your sample, titrate it and receive the result.

You enter the sample data such as weight or volume directly before the start of each sample

determination. These data are also entered in the sample data memory. To modify them during

the titration or to add samples to a defined sample series, you can open the Sample menu.

While a method is running, you can call up the auxiliary functions "Stirrer" and "Results"; all

other auxiliary functions and the Setup and Method menus are blocked.

In this menu, the functions of the Run and command key <F5> are identical, in other words you

can press one or other key.

The performance of the four titrators differs in this menu as follows:

DL50/DL53:

DL55/DL58:

One titration curve is displayed (EQP/EP titration: Potential vs. Volume,

pH/mV titration: Potential vs. Time).

Seven titration curves for the display can be selected.

You can interrupt the analysis of a sample to modify parameters of the

ongoing method.


Menu sequence

Run

5.1 Menu sequence up to insertion of the sample

When you press the Run key, there are two possibilities for the display (as an example of the

representation, the standard method "Equivalence point titration" is used. This has been

changed for the determination of CaCl 2 and stored with the identification 00001):

No data in sample data memory:

All sample data in sample data memory (see

Section 4.1):


RUN


RUN

Number of samples 3

Method ID 00001

User

Start

3 samples, Method 00001

Delete Start

Defined are

RUN

Defined are

RUN

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141


Esc Print OK

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141


Esc Print OK

Sample No. 1

RUN

Sample ID 45320

Weight [g] 1.23452

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0


∇

Balance* OK

* "Balance" appears, if you have defined a

balance in the Setup menu

Current sample

No. 1 of 3

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

OK

RUN

Current sample

No. 1 of 3

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

OK

RUN

The Stir function is being processed

Notes

1. If you have defined an expiry date for the titrant and this has lapsed, an appropriate

message follows the "Defined are" mask. In order to determine a titer before the sample

analysis, you can confirm the message with Esc.

2. When the sample data mask or that of the "Current sample" appears, the sample is active

in the sample data memory. The titrator executes the Sample function of the method and

starts to acquire the time for every determination as the raw result TIME (see Section 5.2:

Example of an analysis sequence and Section 8.1: List of symbols).


Run

Menu sequence

3. The titrator also accepts methods which are stored on an inserted memory card or in an

attached computer: When you enter an identification whose method is not stored in the

titrator, the method is first sought on the memory card and entered (not possible with the

DL50). If the method is not stored there, it is requested from the computer and entered

(see Operating Instructions: Computer Interface Description).

Mask: Samples to be analyzed

Number samples

Method ID

User

Enter, e.g. 3; this enters a sample series.

Enter, e.g. 00001: This calls up the method which should be used for

analysis of the samples.

If you do not know the identification of the method, press <F4> (Modify):

The method groups appear.

– Confirm either user or METTLER methods: The list of these methods

appears.

– Confirm the method you need for the analysis.

Enter your name if a keyboard is attached.

Delete

If, e.g. you have called up a method which you do not wish to use for the

analysis, you can delete it. You have this possibility available with direct

start if you confirm the "Defined are" mask with Esc (see page 5-4).

Mask: Defined are

This mask appears so that you can check whether you have attached the resources required

by the method.

• You can exclude the mask from the sequence (see Section 6.7.3).

• If you have not defined a resource or there is no RS or sensor option available for the defined

resource, an appropriate error message appears.

Mask: Sample No. 1 (sample data mask)

This mask does not appear if you

• have defined "Fixed volume" as entry type in the Sample function

• have not defined a predispensing to "factor x sample size" in the EQP/EP titration function

• have defined results such as "R = Q" in the Calculation function(s) which do not require the

sample size m.


Menu sequence

Run

If you still have to enter sample data such as the temperature for buffer solutions to be

measured in a sensor calibration, you can do this for every sample in the Sample menu (see

Section 4.1).

Sample ID

Enter or modify or delete if you have already defined the identification in

the Sample function (see Section 3.3.2).

Weight Enter or transfer from an attached balance (see Section 4.2).

(Volume) If you can not enter the weight or volume until during the titration as, e.g.

you do not wish to lose time through back weighing, do not enter anything.

As the titrator does not need the sample size until it performs calculations,

the sample data mask appears again in the display during the titration:

• either when the titrator reaches the EQP/EP titration function under

which a predispensing to (factor x sample size) has been defined

• or when it reaches the Calculation function under which the sample size

m is needed for the result.

You can also enter weight/volume in the Sample menu (see Section 5.2:

Example of a pH-stating).

If you violate the upper or lower limits of the weight/volume but still confirm

the entry, an appropriate message appears (see Section 4.1).

Limits

Correction factor

Temperature

You can not change the limits. This information does not appear if you

have defined a fixed volume in the Sample function.

You can enter a value for each sample which is reconciled in the

calculations if you insert f in the formula of the Calculation function (see

Section 4.1).

Enter that of the solution to be titrated. You can not change the value if

you have defined a temperature sensor in the Sample function.

Mask: Current sample

• If you work with a sample changer, in other words you have defined "ST20A" as a titration

stand, the mask always appears, but is confirmed automatically (no OK command).

• If you have defined "Auto stand" as the titration stand, the mask does not appear as a system,

e.g. a robot undertakes insertion or changing of the sample.


Run

Analysis sequence

5.2 Analysis sequence of a sample

1st example: Method 00001 (see Section 5.1)

Sample No. 1

Sample ID 45320

Weight [g] 1.23452

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0


Current sample

No. 1 of 3

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

RUN

∇

Balance OK

RUN

OK

The titrator starts to process the method with the

Sample function.

(– Enter ID.)

– Weigh in sample, enter the weight for the first

sample or have it transferred from a balance.

(– Enter correction factor and temperature.)

– Press <F5> or the Run key.

– Before you confirm this mask, fix the sample beaker

to the titration stand.

Stir function

Wait time [s] 30

Speed [%] 80

RUN

Hold 1)

The titrator stirs with 80% of the maximum speed for

30 seconds (CaCl 2 dissolves during this time). The

elapse of time is displayed.

1) appears only with the DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

mV

E – V curve

The titrator executes the EQP titration function.

mL


1) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see next page)

2) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

Result list

Method: 00001

Sample 1

R1 = 29.26 %

OK

RUN

After the last method function, in other words before

the result list appears, the titrator ends the time

acquisition for this sample determination (see Note 2,

Section 5.1): The sample is present in the sample

data memory as done.

Sample No. 2

Sample ID 45321

Weight [g] 1.08723

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0


Balance OK

RUN

∇

The sample data mask for the second sample appears:

– Procede as described under sample 1.

Current sample

No. 2 of 3

Sample ID 45321

Method ID 00001

OK

RUN

You are "prompted" to insert the second sample etc.


Analysis sequence

Run

At the end of the series, the results of all samples appear in the display.

• If you confirm this result list, the mask "Samples to be analyzed" again appears. The method

used to perform the last titration is entered as method.

• In the sample data memory, all samples of this series are present as done. You can now add

samples to this series here (see Section 4.1.4).

• As soon as you start a new series or an individual sample, all data of the executed series

will be deleted.

Notes

1. Changing stirrer speed

During a titration you can always activate the Stirrer key to change the stirrer speed (see

Section 6.2).

2. Method with two different titrants/sensors

If, e.g. you have to use two titrants for a back titration and have only one burette drive, the

following message (example) appears:

Change resources

RUN

Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L HCl

OK

If you have to use two sensors to, e.g. set the pH before the actual determination with a

phototrode and have only one sensor option, "Sensor 1: DP660" appears.

The message always appears before the function in which the second resource is needed.

3. DL55/DL58: Curve display

During the EQP/EP titration or EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol) or pH/mV-stat function, the

command <F4> (Curve) remains active if the curve representation has been selected. You

can select the following curves for the display:

E – V curve

Potential vs. Volume


1st derivative (Potential vs. Volume)

log ∆E/∆V – V curve

1st derivative (Potential vs. Volume, logarithmic)

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 – V curve

2nd derivative (Potential vs. Volume)

E – t curve

Potential vs. Time

V – t curve

Volume vs. Time


1st derivative (Volume vs. Time)


Run

Analysis sequence

4. Result list

a. During a titration, you can always activate the Results key to view the results generated

to date (see Section 6.5.1).

b. All results of a learn titration are marked in the display by an exclamation mark(!).

c. With a sample series, the titrator skips the list for each sample you have excluded from

the analysis sequence (see Section 6.7.3).

d. With a sample series, all menus and auxiliary functions between the individual

determinations are again accessible if you do not confirm the result list of the sample.

You can then, e.g. also modify the method used to analyze the samples of this series

(see Section 5.2.3).

This is no longer possible if you exclude the "Result list for each sample" from the

sequence (see point c.).


Analysis sequence

Run

2nd example: pH-stating

This sequence of a pH-stating in which the titrator should start the titration immediately

after sample addition shows the entry of the sample data in the Sample menu during the

titration:

Sample No. 1

RUN The titrator executes the Sample function.


Sample ID 592

Weight [g] 0.0

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0


∇

Balance OK

Current sample

RUN

No. 1 of 5

Sample ID 592

Method ID 33

OK

mV

E – t curve

s

– Confirm the sample data mask without entering the

weight.

– Add the sample and immediately confirm with OK.

The titrator starts the pH-stating (the Stir function

does not appear as the stirring time is defined with 0

(zero).

1) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see page 5-8)

2) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

Press

Sample

No. Status Wt/Vol. Meth. ID

The sample data list appears.

1 active 0.0 33 592

2 ready 0.0 33 593

3 ready 0.0 33 594

Print Modify Add

Sample No. 1

SAMPLE

Sample ID 592

Weight [g] 0.1456

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0


∇

Balance OK

The sample data mask appears.

– Enter the weight.

Press

Run

mV

E – t curve

s

Table Values Curve Hold

If the pH-stating is not yet complete, the E - t curve of

the pH/mV-stat function is again displayed. Otherwise,

the function executed by the titrator appears.


Run

Analysis sequence

5.2.1 Fading out analysis

During the titration you can

• enter sample data: press the Sample key (see Section 4.1 and example on previous page)

• change the stirrer speed: press the Stirrer key (see Section 6.2)

• view all results generated to date: press the Results key (see Section 6.5.1).

The titration continues to run in the background.

– To display it again, press the Run key: The display shows the method function which is

currently being executed by the titrator.

5.2.2 Analysis is interrupted

The titrator immediately interrupts an analysis in the following situations:

1. After the Learn titration function if it has not found any equivalence points (see Section

3.3.8).

– Confirm the error message: The representation of the Titration function shown before the

interruption appears in the display (see example below).

If you wish the titrator to execute the remaining functions of the method,

– press <F5>, "Proceed": The titrator executes the remaining functions.

2. At the immediate end of an EQP titration or EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function when the

condition for the defined parameter Stop for reevaluation is met (see Sections 3.3.6.7 and

3.3.9.8). The following display appears:

Reevaluation required

RUN

EQP titr. [1] neq=0

Confirm with OK and perform

reevaluation (RESULTS)

OK

(Example)

Measured values

6.789 mL

265.9 mV

RUN

Table Curve Proceed

You can now confirm "Proceed" (the analysis is continued) or press the Results key to

perform the reevaluation, see Section 6.5.2.


Analysis sequence

Run

Note: If a method is interrupted which is not stored in the titrator but has been requested from

the computer or a memory card, a reevaluation is not possible (see Section 5.1: Note

3 and Section 6.5.2).

5.2.3 Modifying method of the current sample series

After every sample determination, you can modify the method used to perform the series. A

requirement is that you do not exlude the "Result list for each sample" from the analysis

sequence (see Section 6.7.3).

If you wish to modify the functions of the method,

• all parameters of the Sample function are blocked with the exception of the numeric

parameters you have defined for the ST20A titration stand.

• with all other functions you can change only the numeric parameter values.

When you save the method, the printer automatically records the complete method with the

modified values: these remain stored for the method.

– To continue the sample series, press the Run key twice: The prompt to insert the next sample

appears.

Note: You can not change a method which is not stored in the titrator but is requested from

the computer or the memory card.

5.2.4 Aborting analysis

If you wish to abort the sample which is currently being titrated, press the Reset key. The mask

"METTLER TOLEDO/DL5x/Version x.x" appears.

• If you abort the sample at a time at which a result has already been calculated this is

displayed in the result list (auxiliary function "Results"). If no result has been calculated, only

the sample number will be listed.

Individual sample

The sample is present in the sample data memory as done and is deleted as soon as you start

the analysis of a new sample.

Sample series

A series is not aborted with Reset: The sample is present in the sample data memory as done.

With Run the display for the remaining samples of the series appears (example):


RUN


Delete Start


Run

DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

5.3 DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

If you confirm "Hold" during a sample determination, the titrator stops the function it is currently

executing. You can then modify the method used to analyze the sample:

- Press the Method key (example):

Methods

METHOD

Method ID 00001

Print Modify

Notice

METHOD

Parameters that you can

not modify are blocked.

OK

With OK the functions of the interrupted method appear.

• All parameters of the Sample function are blocked with the exception of the numeric

parameter values you have defined for the ST20A titration stand.

• With all other functions you can modify only the numeric parameter values.

If you save the method, the printer automatically records the complete method with the modified

values; these remain stored for the method.

To continue the sample series,

– press the Run key: The representation shown before the interruption appears in the display.

– Press the Run key or <F5>: The analysis sequence is continued.

In the case of an interrupted sample determination, the modifications apply only to the

functions which the titrator has not yet started to execute. Exceptions are the Stir, EQP/EP

titration, EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol) and pH/mV-stat functions.

1st example: Stir function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify not only the stirring and wait times,

but also the rotational speed. On continuation of the determination, the titrator

• adds the difference between the defined and modified times to the stirring time remaining:

the entire stirring time corresponds to the modified time and

• stirs at the modified speed.


DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

Run

2nd example: Dispense function

If you interrupt the method at this function, change the volume and then continue the

determination, the new volume is not added until the next sample determination.

3rd example: EQP titration function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify, e.g. the value for the maximum

volume or the potential value for termination of the titration if this termination parameter is

defined within the method.

On continuation of the method, the titrator executes the modified parameters of the EQP

titration.

4th example: pH/mV-stat function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify, e.g. the value for the control band,

the volume for the minimum consumption or the time for the defined termination criteria.

On continuation of the method, the titrator executes the modified parameters of the pH-stat

function.

Note: You can not modify a method which is not stored in the titrator but is requested from the

computer or the memory card (see Section 5.1: Note 3).


Run

DL55/DL58: Running sample series

5.4 DL55/DL58: Running sample series

You can store three sample series in the sample data memory of the DL55/DL58. These are

processed in this menu by the titrator in sequence with your help. An attached sample changer

automates this procedure.

You can check the ongoing method in the Sample menu (see Section 4).

As soon as the next sample series is started, all data of the executed series are deleted. At

the end of the processed sample series, only the data of the last series remain stored. They

are deleted as soon as you start the determination of a new sample or series.

With all titration stands, the sample data mask appears only if you have not entered the weight

(volume) for the samples before the start of the method.

If you work with titration stand 1, 2 or an external stand, you must confirm the mask "Current

sample" for every sample.

If you have attached a sample changer, the titrator titrates the samples of all measurement

methods without the need for your intervention. A requirement is that

• you have entered all sample data

• you have excluded the mask "Defined are" from the analysis sequence (see Section 6.7.3)

• the methods use the same resources or their setup data are defined at the other drive

(titrants), at a different sensor option (sensors) or at the other ST20A output (solvents) (see

comparison of the titration sequences on the following page).

If you work with the auto stand, the mask "Current sample" does not appear, in other words

each sample determination is started without confirmation. As a result, you can attach a robot

to handle sample changing. The same prerequisites hold for the automatic running of sample

series as for the use of the sample changer.







Run

Comparison of the analysis sequences for three sample series at the ST20A titration stand or at stand 1, 2 or the

external stand. (The masks "Defined are" and "Result list for each sample" are excluded from the sequence for

stand 1/2/external.)


RUN

ST20A


6 samples, Method 2


Delete Start

Stand 1/2/external

Current sample

No. 1 of 3

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

RUN

Current sample

No. 1 of 3

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

OK

RUN

The mask "Current sample" appears for every sample,

but is confirmed automatically.

The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001.

It then starts to titrate the samples of method 2 (the

setup data are the same as for method 00001).

It then starts to titrate the samples of method 8 (the

setup data are the same as for method 00001). At the

end of all sample determinations of method 8, the

following appears:

Result list

Method: 8

Sample 1

R1 = 97.386 %

Sample 2

OK

RUN

∇

The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001. At the

end of the 3 determinations, the following appears:

Result list

Method: 00001

Sample 1

R1 = 29.26 %

Sample 2

Current sample

No. 1 of 6

Sample ID 11

Method ID 2

Result list

Method: 2

Sample 1

R1 = 4.234 mmol

R2 = 2.31 g/L

OK

OK

OK

RUN

∇

RUN

The titrator titrates all samples of method 2. At the end

of the 6 determinations, the following appears:

RUN

∇

Current sample

No. 1 of 10

Sample ID 432148

Method ID 8

OK

RUN

The titrator titrates all samples of method 8. At the end

of the 10 determinations, the result list with the results

of all samples of this method appears (see mask in

ST20A column).


Run


If the titrator has to process methods which have the same burette drives or sensor inputs in succession on the

sample changer, you have to intervene:


RUN



Delete Start

Current sample

No. 1 of 4

Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

RUN

The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001.

It then starts to execute the functions of the first

sample of method 111: a different titrant and a different

sensor are required. The following message appears

before the Titration function in which the titrant

and the sensor are defined:

Change resources

Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L EDTA

Sensor 1: DP660

OK

RUN

– Place the burette with the EDTA solution on burette

drive 2 and attach the DP660/DP5 Phototrode

to sensor input 1 (pH option in slot 1) and

plug into titration stand.

If you confirm the message, the titrator executes the

remaining functions of the method, it then titrates the

other samples. At the end of the 7 determinations, the

result list with the results of all samples of this method

appears.

The mask "Current sample" appears for every sample,

but is confirmed automatically.


Auxiliary functions

Contents

Page

6. Auxiliary functions .................................................................................... 6-3

6.1 Sensor ........................................................................................................ 6-4

6.1.1 Measure potential........................................................................................ 6-4

6.1.2 Measure temperature .................................................................................. 6-5

6.1.3 Calibrate temperature sensors .................................................................... 6-6

6.1.4 Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol) ............................................................ 6-7

6.2 Stirrer ......................................................................................................... 6-8

6.3 Sample changer ........................................................................................ 6-9

6.3.1 Change lift position...................................................................................... 6-9

6.3.2 Rotate turntable........................................................................................... 6-9

6.3.3 Dispense/rinse ............................................................................................ 6-10

6.4 Burette........................................................................................................ 6-11

6.4.1 Rinse burette ............................................................................................... 6-11

6.4.2 Rinse tip ...................................................................................................... 6-12

6.4.3 Dispense ..................................................................................................... 6-12

6.4.4 Dispense continuously ................................................................................ 6-13

6.4.5 Titrate manually ........................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.4 Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)............................................................... 6-15

6.4.6 Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol) ......................................................................... 6-16

6.5 Results ....................................................................................................... 6-18

6.5.1 Display result list ......................................................................................... 6-18

6.5.2 Perform reevaluation ................................................................................... 6-18

6.5.3 Perform calculations.................................................................................... 6-20

6.5.4 Display measured values ............................................................................ 6-21

6.5.5 Modify statistics ........................................................................................... 6-22

6.6 Report......................................................................................................... 6-24


Auxiliary functions

Page

6.7 Miscellaneous............................................................................................ 6-26

6.7.1 Define titrator settings ................................................................................. 6-26

6.7.1.1 Date/time format.......................................................................................... 6-26

6.7.1.2 Date/time ..................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.3 Language .................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.4 Report header ............................................................................................. 6-27

6.7.1.5 Titrator ID .................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.6 Audio signal................................................................................................. 6-28

6.7.2 Adjust measuring inputs .............................................................................. 6-28

6.7.3 Shorten analysis sequence ......................................................................... 6-30

6.7.4 Define user level ......................................................................................... 6-31

6.7.5 Activate control input ................................................................................... 6-32

6.7.6 Activate control output................................................................................. 6-33

6.8 Data transfer .............................................................................................. 6-36

6.8.1 Memory card ............................................................................................... 6-36

6.8.2 Computer .................................................................................................... 6-40

6.8.3 Remote control ............................................................................................ 6-42

6.8.4 Bar-code string ............................................................................................ 6-43


Auxiliary functions

6. Auxiliary functions

You can use these symbol keys to perform the activities mentioned below. These auxiliary

functions are independent of a titration method, but they can support or supplement a method.

While a titration is running, you can activate only the functions of the Stirrer and Results keys,

all other keys are blocked.

Sensor

• Measure potential or temperature of a solution

• Calibrate temperature sensors

• Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

Stirrer

• Switch stirrer on or off, change stirrer speed

Changer

Burette

Results

Report

*

• Operate sample changer manually

• Rinse burette and burette tip

• Dispense a specified volume

• Dispense continuously

• Titrate manually

• Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)

• Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

• Display result list of all samples of a series

• Modify evaluation of an EQP titration

• Perform additional calculations of the sample last titrated

• Display measured values of the sample last titrated

• Modify statistical evaluation of the series last titrated

• Print out additional reports of the series last performed or sample last

titrated

Misc. ...

Data

Transfer

• Define date and language

• Enter calibration data of the measuring inputs

• Modify analysis sequence

• Change user level

• Activate control inputs and outputs

• Copy data from titrator to the memory card and vice versa (not possible

with DL50)

• Transfer data from the titrator to the computer

• Select whether titrator should be controlled by the computer

• Enter bar-code string (computer transfer)


Sensor

6.1 Sensor

When you press the Sensor key, the following auxiliary functions appear:

Measure potential

Measure temperature


Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

6.1.1 Measure potential

You can measure the potential of solutions (mV, pH, %T, etc.).

Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV


Speed [%] 50



Report

No

∆t [s] 5

Sensor

Unit of measurement

Titration stand

Speed

Temperature




You can select a different measurement unit from the selection menu

(press <F4>).

Press <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or External

stand; this tells the titrator what stirrer it has to control.

• 0% → The stirrer is at a standstill.

• 100% → The stirrer stirs at maximum speed.

Enter the temperature of the solution to be measured if you have not

attached a temperature sensor.

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: Manual, TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

Report

∆t [s]

Use <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value will be recorded

every 5 seconds if you accept the time interval of "5".


Sensor

You can start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the potential of the solution. The

measured values are shown in the display and are recorded.

During the measurement, all other keys are blocked.

6.1.2 Measure temperature

You can measure the temperature of solutions (°C, °F or K).

Temperature sensor TEMP A

Unit of meas. °C


Speed [%] 50

Report

No

∆t [s] 5

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

Unit of meas. Press <F4> to select: °C, °F or K.

Titration stand

Speed

Report

∆t [s]





Press <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value is recorded every

5 seconds if you accept a time interval of "5".

Start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the temperature of the solution. The

measured values are shown in the display and are recorded.



Sensor

6.1.3 Calibrate temperature sensors

You can calibrate your Pt100 or Pt1000 sensors. The zero point determined by this procedure

is entered together with the date in the parameter mask of the corresponding temperature

sensor (see Section 2.3).


SENSOR

Temperature sensor TEMP A

Esc Modify Start

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

– Press <F5>: the mask with the prompt to immerse the sensor in ice

water appears. (We advise you to use a Dewar vessel.)

– When you are certain that the sensor has cooled to 0 °C, confirm this

with OK:

• The calibration was successful if Modify and Start reappear in the

display. You can calibrate the next Pt sensor.

• If the measured temperature value does not lie between -2 °C and

+2 °C, an appropriate error message appears.

– Confirm this message and first "check" the temperature value given

by the sensor using the auxiliary function Measure temperature



Sensor

6.1.4 Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

You can measure the voltage or the current of solutions with polarized sensors (mV, µA).

Sensor

DM142

Indication

Voltametric


Speed [%] 50

Report

No

∆t [s] 5

Sensor

Indication

Titration stand

Speed

Report

∆t [s]

Press <F4> to open the list containing the polarized sensors you have

defined in the Setup menu (see Section 2.4). Confirm the one you want

with OK.

Press <F4> to select: "Voltametric" or "Amperometric":

Voltametric: Enter the current value which should be applied to the

sensor to measure the voltage.

Amperometric: Enter the voltage value which should be applied to the

sensor to measure the current.





Use <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value will be recorded

every 5 seconds if you accept the time interval of "5".

You can start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the voltage or current of the solution.

The measured values are shown in the display and are recorded.



Stirrer

6.2 Stirrer

You can start the stirrer and change its speed, e.g. to dissolve a substance.

Stirrer

STIRRER


Speed [%] 50

Modify

Start

Titration stand

Speed





Start and stop the stirrer with <F5>.

Start: The stirrer stirs at the specified speed.

Changing the speed during a titration

To change the speed during a sample determination:

– press the Stirrer key (this does not interrupt the method):

Stirrer

STIRRER

Speed [%] 50

OK

– Change the speed and confirm with OK: the stirrer stirs at the new speed or is at a standstill

if you have entered zero.

– To follow the analysis sequence in the display again, press the Run key.


Changer

6.3 Sample changer





You can control the sample changer (titration stand: ST20A) and the attached pumps/

dispensers manually. For this you must define the sample changer in the Setup menu and have

attached it (see Section 2.7.4).

Sample changer


Rotate turntable

Dispense/rinse

CHANGER

OK

6.3.1 Change lift position


CHANGER

Lift position

bottom

Esc Modify Start

Position

Use <F4> to select: bottom, middle or top.

Press <F5> to move the lift to the desired position.


Changer

6.3.2 Rotate turntable

Rotate turntable

CHANGER

Direction

forward

Number of positions 1

Esc Modify Start

Direction

Number of

positions

Press <F4> to select: forward or backward.

Enter the number of positions the turntable should move forward or

backward.

Press <F5> to move the turntable the specified number of positions

forward or backward.

6.3.3 Dispense/rinse

If you have attached a pump or a dispenser to an ST20A output, you can dispense or rinse the

sensor in the titration vessel.

Dispense/rinse

CHANGER

ST20A output

RINSE

Esc Modify Start

ST20A output

Use <F4> to select: DOSE, RINSE or DISPENSER.

Start and stop the dispensing or rinsing process with <F5>.

Note: The relay at the "DISPENSER" output closes for 0.5 s and triggers

the dispensing.


Burette

6.4 Burette

When you press the Burette key, the following auxiliary functions appear:

Rinse burette

Rinse tip

Dispense

Dispense continuously

Titrate manually

Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)

Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

6.4.1 Rinse burette

Rinse burette

BURETTE


Esc Modify Start

Burette drive Press <F4> to select : Drive 1

DL50/DL53: The Modify command is missing.

Start and stop the rinsing process with <F5>.

Start: The titrator discharges 1 burette volume. The piston of the burette

moves below its zero position to ensure that air bubbles "hidden"

in the stopcock are drawn in then expelled.


Burette

6.4.2 Rinse tip

Rinse tip

BURETTE


Esc Modify Start

Burette drive Press <F4> to select: Drive 1


Start: 5% of the burette volume are discharged to eliminate any diffusion

with solvent in the dispensing tube tip.

6.4.3 Dispense

You can dispense a defined volume.

Dispense

BURETTE


Burette volume 10 mL

Volume [mL] 1.0

Esc Modify Start



Burette volume

Volume

Press <F4> to select: 20, 1, 5 or 10 mL.

Enter the volume to be dispensed.

Start: The titrator dispenses the specified volume.


Burette

6.4.4 Dispense continuously

You can dispense stepwise and follow the potential change as a function of the dispensing in

the display. You must define the following parameters:


Burette volume

10 mL

Rate [mL/min] 1.0

Sensor

DG111


Speed [%] 50





Burette volume

Rate

Sensor

Titration stand

Speed

Temperature


is the rate of dispensing.


the Setup menu. Confirm the one you want with OK. The sensor acquires

the measured values in the measurement unit you have defined for this

sensor (see Section 2.2.2).

Use <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or External







Start and stop the dispensing with <F5>.

Start: The titrator dispenses continuously and acquires the potential

values of the changing solution. The measured values "mL" and

"mV, pH,..." are displayed.


Burette

6.4.5 Titrate manually

You can titrate manually and follow the potential change as a function of the dispensed volume

in the display. You must define the following parameters:

Titrant

NaOH


Sensor

DG111

Unit of meas.

mV


Speed [%] 50



Titrant

Concentration

Sensor

Unit of measurement

Titration stand

Speed

Temperature







You can select a different measurement unit from the selection menu

(press <F4>).









Burette

Use <F5> to start, interrupt and continue the titration, use <F1> to

terminate it.

Start: The titrator starts to dispense and increases the dispensing

rate continuously. The measured values "mL" and "mV, pH,..."

are displayed.

Hold: The dispensing is interrupted, but measurement of the potential

value continues.

Proceed: The titrator starts again to dispense at the smallest dispensing

rate, in other words you control the addition in the vicinity of the

desired end point with the <F5> key.

End: The titration is terminated.

The results are displayed: the volume in "mL" and "mmol" and the potential

in the selected measurement unit. You can print out these results.

6.4.6 Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)

You can dispense stepwise and follow the voltage and current change as a function of the

dispensing in the display. You must define the following parameters:


Burette volume

10 mL

Rate [mL/min] 1.0

Sensor

DM142

Indication

Voltametric


Speed [%] 50



Burette volume

Rate

Sensor


is the rate of dispensing.



with OK.


Burette

Indication

Titration stand

Speed

Use <F4> to select:"Voltametric" or "Amperometric":





Use <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or External




Start and stop the dispensing with <F5>.

Start: The titrator dispenses continuously and acquires the voltage or

current values of the changing solution. The measured values "mL"

and "mV" or "µA" are displayed.

6.4.5 Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

You can titrate manually and follow the voltage or current change as a function of the dispensed

volume in the display. You must define the following parameters:

Titrant 1 / 2 I 2


Sensor

DM142

Indication

Voltametric


Speed [%] 50

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor






with OK.


Burette

Indication

Titration stand

Speed

Use <F4> to select:"Voltametric" or "Amperometric":









Use <F5> to start, interrupt and continue the titration, use <F1> to

terminate it.

Start: The titrator starts to dispense and increases the dispensing

rate continuously. The measured values "mL" and "mV" or

"µA" are displayed.

Hold: The dispensing is interrupted, but measurement of the voltage

or current value continues.

Proceed: The titrator starts again to dispense at the smallest dispensing

rate, in other words you control the addition in the vicinity of the

desired end point with the <F5> key.

End: The titration is terminated.

The results are displayed: the volume in "mL" and "mmol" and the voltage

value in "mV" or the current value in "µA". You can print out these results.


Results

*

6.5 Results

You can also press the Results key during a titration. The following auxiliary functions can be

executed:

Display result list

Perform reevaluation 1)

Perform calculations

Display measured values

Modify statistics

1) appears only when the titrator interrupts the analysis (see Section 6.5.2)

6.5.1 Display result list

You can view the results generated in the titration of a sample or a sample series. The list is

displayed at the earliest (press <F5>) during the first titration (only "Method ID" and "Sample

1" appear if no result is available).

6.5.2 Perform reevaluation

The parameters for the reevaluation of an EQP titration are displayed when the titrator

interrupts the current EQP titration or EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function immediately before

completion as the defined condition for the Stop for reevaluation parameter is met (see

Sections 3.3.6.7 and 3.3.9.8). In such a case, the message "Reevaluation required" appears

(see Section 5.2.2) and you can modify the following parameters under this auxiliary function

(example):

Threshold 1000


Range

Yes

Tendency

Positive

Potential 1

No

Potential 2

No

Maximum volume 5

– Modify the appropriate parameters and press <F5>.

A mask appears in which you can choose whether you wish to save the modifications of these

method parameters for this sample or sample series permanently or only temporarily.


Results

The titrator then reevaluates the titration curve.

At the same time, the printer records this EQP titration/ EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function with

the modified parameters. (If your changes still do not meet the defined condition, the message

"Reevaluation required" reappears.)

*

– To continue the interrupted sample determination, press the Run key: The representation

of the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function shown before the interruption appears

in the display.

– Press <F5>: The titrator executes either the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function

(if, e.g. dispensing must be continued owing to the modified parameters) or the next function.

Notes

1. To evaluate the effects of your changes, you can

• view and print out the table of measured values or curve (see Sections 6.5.4 and 6.6).

• check the new raw results of the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function:

– select the auxiliary function Perform calculations (see Section 6.5.3)

– assign the raw results to Rx or Cx , e.g. Rx = VEQ or Cx = VP1.

2. "Perform reevaluation" does not appear if the interrupted method is not stored in the titrator

but on the memory card or in the computer (see Section 5.1).

3. With the DL55/DL58, "Perform reevaluation" also appears if you interrupt the current EQP

titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function of a user method after a possible predispensing.

The auxiliary function does not appear if the interrupted method is a METTLER method.


Results

*

6.5.3 Perform calculations

At the end of a titration, you can perform additional calculations for these samples. The function

appears when you press the Results key on completion of the titration. In the case of a sample

series, this is possible only if the "Result list for each sample" is not excluded from the sequence

of a series (see Section 6.7.3).

DL55/DL58:

The auxiliary function also appears if you interrupt the titration and then press

the Results key.

When you select the auxiliary function, the following parameters appear:

Formula Rx =

Q*Cx/m

Constant Cx =

M/(10*z)

Decimal places 3

Result unit %

Result name

Formula

Constant

Press <F4> to open the "List of formulas" and accept a different formula

from the list or enter the one you need for your calculation (see also

Section 8.4: Examples of formulas).

Press <F4> to open the "List of constants" and accept a different constant

from the list or enter the one you need for your calculation.

Symbol

You can take the symbols you need for your calculation from the list you

obtain when you press <F3>. This includes all symbols possible for the

individual functions (see Section 3.3.12: Calculation function and Section

8.1: List of symbols).

Decimal places

Result unit

Result name

Enter the number of decimal places you wish to have in your result.

Press <F4> to select the unit from the selection menu.

You can enter the name using an attached keyboard.

Press <F5> to calculate and display the result(s), press <F3> to print it

(them) out.


6.5.4 Display measured values

Results

*

On completion of every titration, you can display the table of measured values or view the

titration curve of this sample again. The function appears when you press the Results key at

the end of the titration. With a sample series, this is possible only if the "Result list for each

sample" is not excluded from the sequence of the series (see Section 6.7.3).

When you select the auxiliary function, the following appears (example):

Measured values

5.621 mL

-267.3 mV

RESULTS

Table Curve 1) OK

You can view either the table of measured values, the measured value

pair Potential/Volume or the titration curve.

1) DL50: With the "(display) Curve" command, the E-V curve is shown in the case of an EQP/

DL53: EP titration and the E-t curve with a pH-stat titration.

1) DL55: The "(display) Curve" command remains active when you have selected it. Press

DL58: <F4> to show the selection menu from which you can select one of the possible

curve representations:

E – V curve


log ∆E/∆V – V curve

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 – V curve

E – t curve

V – t curve


Potential vs Volume

1st derivative (Potential vs Volume)

1st derivative (Potential vs Volume, logarithmic)

2nd derivative (Potential vs Volume)

Potential vs Time

Volume vs Time

1st derivative (Volume vs Time)

When you confirm one of the curves with OK, it is displayed.


Results

*

6.5.5 Modify statistics

If you have selected Statistics: Yes in the method under the Calculation function(s), the mean

value is calculated with a sample series of 2 samples, with more than 2 samples you also obtain

the standard deviation and the relative standard deviation. This auxiliary function is then

accessible under the Results menu to modify the statistical evaluation, i.e. to allow elimination

of outliers.

The function appears when you press the Results key on completion of every titration. This is

possible only if the "Result list for each sample" is not excluded from the sequence of the series


Modify statistics

Display evaluation

Delete result

Undo deletion

Esc

RESULTS

OK

Display

evaluation

Example of a statistical evaluation with 6 samples

Statistical evaluation

RESULTS

R1 n = 6

x = 1.234 %

s = 0.01268 % ∇

OK

Delete result

Using the result list you decide what sample result is an outlier and then

delete it.

Delete result

RESULTS

Sample No. 1

Result R 1

Esc

OK

– Enter the number of the sample whose result should be deleted, e.g.

2.

– Enter the number (index) of the result defined by the Calculation function.


Delete result

Results

If you confirm OK, the result is deleted and the statistical data are

calculated with the new number of samples. You can delete several

sample results and always view the final result in the mask "Statistical

evaluation" (example):

*

Statistical evaluation

s = 0.00346 %

srel = 0.112 %

Outlier

Sample No. 2 deleted

RESULTS

OK

You can use the parameter "All results" of the auxiliary function Report

to print out the new evaluation (see Section 6.6).

Undo deletion

As long as the result list of this sample series remains stored, you can

undo the deletion for all sample results:

Undo deletion

RESULTS

Sample No. 1

Result R 1

Esc

OK

– Enter the number of the sample and that of the corresponding result R:

The result of this sample will be reincorporated in the statistical

calculation.


Report

6.6 Report

On completion of each sample series, you can print out additional reports or transfer them to

a computer (see also Section 3.3.16: Report function). In the case of a sample series, this is

possible only if you have not excluded the "Result list for each sample" from the sequence of

the series (see Section 6.7.3).

DL55/DL58: You can activate the auxiliary function if you interrupt the titration and then press

the Report key.

Report

REPORT

Output Printer

Results

No

All results No ∇

Modify Start

Output

Results

All results

Raw results

Table of

measured values

Sample data

E – V curve

Press <F4> to select the output unit to which the data should be sent:

• Printer,

• Memory card (not with the DL50)

• Computer,

• Printer + memory card (not with the DL50) or

• Printer + computer.

All results of the sample last determined defined in the Calculation

functions are recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

Results of all samples generated to date are recorded when you select

"Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>. They also include the statistical data if

these have been calculated (see Section 6.5.5).

The raw results of the sample last determined are recorded when you

select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

The table of measured values of the sample last determined is recorded

when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

The sample data of all samples of the current series are recorded when

you select "Yes" with <F4> press <F5>.

The titration curve Potential vs Volume of the sample last determined is

recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.


Report


log ∆E/∆V – V

curve

∆ 2 E/∆V 2 – V

curve

E – t curve

V – t curve


The 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the sample

last determined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press

<F5>. The ordinate representation is linear.

The 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the sample


<F5>. The ordinate representation is logarithmic.

The 2nd derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the sample


<F5>. The ordinate representation is linear.

The titration curve Potential vs Time of the sample last determined is


The titration curve Volume vs Time of the sample last determined is


The 1st derivative of the titration curve Volume vs Time of the sample last

determined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.


Misc. ...

6.7 Miscellaneous

When you press the Misc. key, the following appears

Define titrator settings

Adjust measuring inputs


Define user level

Activate control input

Activate control output

6.7.1 Define titrator settings

You can or must select or define the following settings for the titrator:

Date/time format

Date/time

Language

Report header

Titrator ID

Audio signal

6.7.1.1 Date/time format

You have several possibilities for the date and time notation. If you wish to change the existing

formats, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Formats

MISC.

Date format 17-OCT-1995

Time format 17:04 (24 h)

Esc Modify OK

Date format

Time format

Press <F4> to select one of the four possible formats.

Press <F4> to select the other format.

If you change the formats, e.g. after a month they are transferred to all

data stored at the time.


Misc. ...

6.7.1.2 Date/time

To change the date or the time, select this menu line and press <F4>; the mask appears in

which you can overwrite the date.

6.7.1.3 Language

In the titrator all texts are stored in English, German, French, Italian and Spanish. To change

the active language, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Language

MISC.

Active language English

Esc Modify OK

Active language

Press <F4> to select one of the languages.

6.7.1.4 Report header

If you wish to enter an identifier or a text (with attached keyboard) which should appear in the

header of every report of a titration method, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Report header

MISC.

Text:

Text:

Esc OK

6.7.1.5 Titrator ID

If you wish to enter an identification for your titrator – this is always recorded – select this menu

line and press <F4>; the mask appears in which you can enter an identification.


Misc. ...

6.7.1.6 Audio signal

An audio signal confirms either every keystroke or draws your attention to instructions, notes

and error messages. When the titrator is delivered, all these parameters are assigned a signal.

To change this, press <F4>:

Audio signal

MISC.

Keystroke Yes

Results Yes

Messages Yes

Esc Modify OK

Keystroke

Results

Messages

Yes: A brief signal sounds after every keystroke.

If you do not wish to hear this, press <F4>: → "No“.

Yes: A brief signal sounds after every result that appears in the display.


Yes: A signal draws your attention to error messages, notes and instructions.


6.7.2 Adjust measuring inputs

The measuring inputs for sensors and temperature sensors must be adjusted to ensure the

titrator measures potential and temperature values correctly.

The adjustment of the measuring inputs is performed by METTLER TOLEDO and the calibration

data of the characteristic line of each input recorded on a data sheet, which is enclosed with

every sensor option (see Section 10.5.1).

The measuring inputs of the pH option installed in slot 1 of the titrator in the factory are adjusted;

the calibration data are stored and can be printed out (see mask).

Measuring inputs

MISC.

Option in slot 1

Option in slot 2 1)

Esc Print Modify OK

1) appears only if a sensor option is installed in the slot


Misc. ...

Notes

1. If you receive a data sheet with a pH option which contains instructions for the entry of the

calibration data, you must follow these: If, for example, you install this or an additional option

in slot 2, you must enter the data of the data sheet for slot 2 (overwrite default values!).

Calibration data

MISC.

Sensor 1: Offset 0

Slope 30950

Temp 1 (Pt100): Offset -15463 ∇

Esc OK

2. If you receive a data sheet with a pH option which contains only calibration data, these are

stored on the option itself. They are automatically adopted for every slot and can not be

deleted. In this case you can only view the data:

Calibration data

MISC.

Sensor 1: Offset 0

Slope 30950

Temp 1 (Pt100): Offset -15463 ∇

Esc OK

3. You always receive a data sheet with a KF option which contains only calibration data, in

other words the data are stored on the option and are automatically adopted for each slot;

they can not be deleted:

Calibration data

MISC.

Sensor 2 (Ipol): Offset 0

Slope 26025

Sensor 2 (Upol): Offset 0 ∇

Esc OK


Misc. ...

6.7.3 Shorten analysis sequence

During the sequence of an analysis, information is shown in the display which you must confirm

with OK to allow the titrator to continue working:

• the mask "Defined are" appears at the start (see Section 5.1), and

• on completion, the "Result list" for every titrated sample within a series (see Section 5.2).

You can exclude these two masks from the analysis sequence to accelerate it.


MISC.

Defined resources

Result list for each sample

Yes

Yes

Esc Modify OK

Defined

resources

Result list

for each sample

Yes: The mask "Defined are" appears before the determination of a

sample or sample series. If this is not required, select "No" with

<F4>.

Yes: Within a sample series the result list appears after the determination

of each sample if you are working with titration stand 1, 2 or external.

If this is not required, select "No" with <F4>.

With series which you perform at a sample changer (titration stand:

ST20A) or at an auto stand, the mask is skipped automatically (see

Sections 5.1 and 5.4).


Misc. ...

6.7.4 Define user level

You can decide if all people who work with the titrator should also have access to the Setup

or Method menu, i.e. have the possibility to delete resources or modify methods. If you have,

e.g. temporary staff who can perform only routine analyses, it is good practice to block their

access to these menus.

Define user level

MISC.

User level

Expert

Esc Modify OK

Expert

Routine

Expert

In the factory setting of the titrator, you have access to all menus. To

change this, select "Routine" with <F4>.

• In the Setup menu you can only print out the defined resources.

• In the Method menu you can only print out the methods.

• In the Data transfer menu, you can not

- transfer data to the computer

- remote-control the titrator

- transfer data to and from the memory card

- delete data on the memory card

- format a memory card.

• In the Analysis menu you can not modify an ongoing method (DL55/

DL58: see Section 5.3).

To switch to the expert level at a later date,

– open this mask,

Define user level

MISC.

User level

Routine

Esc OK

– and while holding down the Shift key, press key 1 three times: "Expert"

and the "Modify" command reappear.


Misc. ...

6.7.5 Activate control input

The RS option has a socket whose two TTL inputs you can activate (see Section 10.7). To do

this, you must have

• installed the option in the third slot,

• attached the devices whose signal should be scanned.

Activate control input

MISC.

Input In 3.1

Esc Modify Start

Input Press <F4> to activate the other input: "In 3.2".

Start: The input signal of the attached device is scanned until you press

<F5> (Stop). The input signal Off corresponds to a voltage of 5 V,

On to a voltage of 0 V.

Example: A level sensor is attached via a TTL input to check the amount

of liquid in a container. The setup is designed for a maximum level of

500 mL:

TTL socket

Level sensor

500 mL

• If the container holds more than 500 mL, the sensor sends the input

signal Off.

• If the container holds less than 500 mL, the sensor sends the input

signal On to indicate that the container should be filled.


Misc. ...

6.7.6 Activate control output

The RS option has a socket whose four TTL outputs you can control (see Section 10.7). To

do this, you must have

• installed the option in the third slot

• attached the devices you intend to control.

Note: TTL are signals which do not transfer power. To operate devices such as a pump,

you must connect an amplifier in the circuit (see Section 10.7)

Activate control output

MISC.

Output Out 3.1

Control mode On/Off

Esc Modify Start

Output Press <F4> to select: "Out 3.2", "Out 3.3", "Out 3.4" or Out 3.1".

Control mode

The following modes are possible (press <F4>):

• On/Off

• Input controlled

• Sequential

On/Off

Start: The attached device is controlled until you press <F5> (Stop). The

output signal On (Start) corresponds to a voltage of 0 V, Off (Stop)

to a voltage of 5 V.

Example: A pump is attached via a TTL output. The pump is switched on

(it dispenses) with "Start" and switched off with "Stop".

Input controlled

Input controlled

MISC.

Input In 3.1

Output signal Normal

Esc Modify OK

Press <F4> to select the other input: "In 3.2".

Press <F4> to select the other signal possibility: "Inverted" (see following

page).


Misc. ...

Control mode

Example: A pump is attached via a TTL output, a level sensor via a TTL

input:

TTL socket

Pump with

supply vessel

Container with

level sensor

The titrator checks at the start whether the signal of the selected input is

in Section 6.7.5).

With this voltage of 0 V the titrator controls the pump (normal output

signal) so that it starts to pump liquid from the supply vessel into the

container with the level sensor.

As soon as this container holds more than 500 mL, the pump is switched

off automatically.

Inverted: The pump can be controlled only with the 5 V signal instead of

the normal output signal of 0 V. When the pump is switched off,

the voltage is 0 V.

Sequential

You can use this special mode to control, e.g. a dispenser.

Sequential

Number of pulses 10

Pulse duration [s] 1.0

Interval [s] 1.0

Esc

MISC.

OK

Each pulse causes the dispenser to dispense a quantity of liquid. This

depends on the pulse duration, which you can find on the data sheet of

the dispenser.


Misc. ...

Control mode

1st pulse

Interval

Off

3rd pulse

Pulse duration

On

Start: The dispensing starts and is stopped automatically when the

sequence has been processed. You can also terminate the dispensing

with <F5> (Stop).


Data

Transfer

6.8 Data transfer

With the DL53, DL55 and DL58 you can back up your data on a memory card. You can also

transfer the data to a computer or control the titrator from the computer; for this you can enter

a bar-code string.

Memory card

Computer 1)

Remote control 1)

Bar-code string 1)

1) These parameters do not appear until you have defined the computer in the Setup

menu (see Section 2.7.3)

6.8.1 Memory card

You can use a memory card with the DL53, DL55 and DL58 to

1. • store user methods and resources when the user data memory is full

• back up all data of the user data memory, i.e. resources and user methods.

You can reload these data when needed on the same or on another titrator of the same

type. The cards you can use are listed in Section 12.8, insertion information in Section

10.6).

2. • store reports of analyses.

You can print these out from the card at any time.

DL50: You can use only a memory card supplied by METTLER TOLEDO to load a new software

version.

Formatting a new card

– Remove the write protection of the card and insert card.

– Confirm "Memory card" with OK: The message "Card not readable" appears. If you confirm

this with OK, the following appears:

Format card

DATA TRANSFER

All data will be deleted!

Esc

Start


Data

Transfer

Start: The card is formatted and the end of the operation displayed.

Note: Formatting of a 1 MB SRAM card takes approx. 30 seconds, that of a 2 MB Flash card

approx. 4 minutes.

The formatting generates a directory and commands.

– Confirm "Memory card" in the Data Transfer mask again:

Display directory

Copy from titrator to card

Copy from card to titrator

Format card

Directory

Directory

DATA TRANSFER

User methods

Resources

Memory copies

Reports

Esc Print OK

Print: A list of the stored methods is printed out.

OK: A list of the methods, resources or memory copies appears if they

are on the card. You can then print out or delete an individual

method, the list of selected resources or the list of the memory

copies.

Reports: If you have selected "Memory card" as output in the function or

auxiliary function Report, the selected results or curves are stored under

the method ID and the date, e.g.

Reports (series)

DATA TRANSFER

90001 18-Oct-1996 11:48

235 22-Oct-1996 14:34

90002 22-Oct-1996 10:03 ∇

Esc Delete OK

<F5> shows the list of the reports for each sample of the series (see

following page):


Data

Transfer

Directory

Reports (samples)

DATA TRANSFER

1 [1] 18-Oct-1996 11:48

2 [1] 18-Oct-1996 12:01

3 [1] 18-Oct-1996 12:23

Esc Delete Print

1, 2 and 3 refer to the sample No., [1] to the number of the Report function

(index, relevant only with special methods). [*] appears if the report has

been sent by the auxiliary function Report (Report key).

<F4> prints out the results and/or curves defined in the function.

From titrator...

Copy to card

DATA TRANSFER

User methods

Resources

Memory copy

Esc OK

User methods: With <F5> the following appears:

Copy method

DATA TRANSFER

Method ID

Esc Modify Start

Enter the identification of the method; if you do not know this, press <F4>:

The list of user methods appears from which you can select the one you

wish to copy.

• If a method with the same ID is stored on the card, an appropriate

message appears.

Resources: <F5> is used to show the list of resources from which you

can select those you wish to copy. Resources stored on the card will be

overwritten.


Data

Transfer

From titrator...

Memory copy: With <F5> the following appears:

Copy

DATA TRANSFER

All data of the user data memory

will be copied on the card.

Esc Start

You use this procedure to generate a backup copy of the user data

memory.

Start: All stored resources and user methods are copied and stored as

"memory copies" on the card with date and time (see following

page). During the copying operation, the message "Data are transferred"

appears.

From card...

Copy to titrator

DATA TRANSFER

User methods

Resources

Memory copies

Esc OK

User methods: Use <F5> to show the mask of the method ID. If you do

not know the identification, press <F4>: The list of user methods appears

from which you can select the one you wish to copy.

• If a method with the same ID is stored in the user data memory, an

appropriate message appears.

• If the sample data list contains data, you can not copy the method until

you have deleted these data (see Section 4).

Resources: Use <F5> to show the list of resources from which you can

select those you wish to copy.

• Titrants stored in the titrator are overwritten if their names and concentrations

are the same as the titrants being copied. All other titrants

remain stored.

• Sensors and solvents stored in the titrator are overwritten if their names

are the same as those being copied.

• All other resources are overwritten (temperature sensors, auxiliary

values, titration stands, peripherals).


Data

Transfer

From card…

Memory copies: With <F5> the following appears (example):

Load memory copy

10-Oct-1996 16:45

11-Nov-1996 10:12

12-Dec-1996 14:34

Esc

DATA TRANSFER

∇

Start

Load

DATA TRANSFER

Notice: All data of the user data

memory will be overwritten!

Esc Start

Start: All data of the user data memory are overwritten by those of the

memory copy of Oct. 10, 1996.

• If the sample data list contains data, you can not load the copy

until you have deleted these data (see Section 4).

Format card

To delete all data on the card in one operation, you can reformat the card

(see start of this section).

6.8.2 Computer

You can transfer user methods and/or defined resources from the titrator to a computer. A

requirement for this is that you have

• defined the computer in the Setup menu and attached it

• loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriate program.

– Switch on the computer and start required program.

– Confirm "Computer" with OK:

Computer

DATA TRANSFER

Transfer from titrator to computer

Esc OK


Data

Transfer

From titrator... Transfer to computer DATA TRANSFER

User methods

Resources

Memory copy

Esc OK

User methods: Use <F5> to show the mask with the method ID. If you

do not know the identification, press <F4>: the list of user methods

appears from which you can select the one you wish to transfer.

Resources: Use <F5> to show the list of resources from which you can

select those you wish to transfer.

Memory copy: With <F5> the following appears:

Transfer

DATA TRANSFER

All data of the user data memory

will be transferred to the computer

Esc Start

Start: All data except those in the sample data memory are transferred.

During the operation, the message "Data are transferred" appears.

Note: You can also transfer data stored in the computer back to the titrator. You will find further

information in the Operating Instructions of the computer interface or in the Operating

Instructions of the DLWin or the LabX titration software.


Data

Transfer

6.8.3 Remote control

You determine whether the titrator is controlled exclusively by a computer. The requirement

for this is that you have loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriate

program.

Remote control

DATA TRANSFER

Status

Off

Esc Modify OK

Status

Press <F4> to select "On": The titrator can be controlled only by the

computer, i.e. you can neither enter data on the titrator, nor start an

analysis nor execute an auxiliary function.

When you have confirmed "On", all that appears is:

Data transfer

DATA TRANSFER

Remote control

Bar-code string

Esc OK

If the sample data list contains data or an auxiliary function is running, an

appropriate error message appears beforehand.

To follow the entries and commands of the computer in the display of the titrator, you can use

the following keys:

• Arrow keys → Scroll parameters of a mask

• Run key → Display of the active function of an ongoing method

• Sample key → Sample data list

• Data transfer key → Switch off remote control

Enter a bar-code string (see next section).

You will find further information on remote control in the Operating Instructions of the computer

interface or in the Operating Instructions of the DLWin or the LabX titration software.


Data

Transfer

6.8.4 Bar-code string

This parameter is intended for automatic systems. The string which is read in by a defined and

attached bar-code reader is immediately transferred to the computer (see Section 2.7.3).

If you do not have a bar-code reader, you can enter the string here with the titrator keyboard.

Enter bar-code string

DATA TRANSFER

>

Esc OK

When you confirm the entry with OK, the string is transferred to the

computer.


DL58

DL58

Contents

Page

7. The DL58 .................................................................................................... 7-3

7.1 Additional resources ................................................................................ 7-4

7.1.1 Control inputs (only with TTLIO) .............................................................. 7-4

7.1.1.1 Modify....................................................................................................... 7-4

7.1.1.2 Add ........................................................................................................... 7-5

7.1.2 Control outputs (only with TTLIO) ............................................................ 7-5

7.1.2.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 7-6

7.1.2.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 7-6

7.1.2.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 7-6

7.2 Special methods........................................................................................ 7-7

7.2.1 Additional commands ............................................................................... 7-7

7.3 Additional functions ................................................................................. 7-10

7.3.1 Temperature ............................................................................................. 7-10

7.3.2 Instruction................................................................................................. 7-11

7.3.3 Pump ........................................................................................................ 7-11

7.3.4 Two-phase titration ................................................................................... 7-12

7.3.4.1 Titrant/Sensor ........................................................................................... 7-12

7.3.4.2 Predispensing .......................................................................................... 7-13

7.3.4.3 Titrant addition.......................................................................................... 7-14

7.3.4.4 Measure mode ......................................................................................... 7-14

7.3.5 Control input ............................................................................................. 7-15

7.3.6 Control output........................................................................................... 7-16

7.3.7 Sync ......................................................................................................... 7-18


DL58

DL58

7. The DL58

This section explains the resources, commands and functions for the development of methods

which the other three titrators do not possess. With the preloaded METTLER and standard

methods, you can change only the parameters of the functions. The DL58 memory holds

additional, Special methods which allow the insertion of identical or new functions or the

deletion of existing functions thus enabling you to develop completely new methods.

Setup menu

Method menu

Special methods

Resources Commands Functions

Control inputs Add Temperature

Control outputs Delete Instruction

Pump

Two-phase titration

Control input

Control output

Sync

Note: You can also run the special methods with the DL53 and DL55 if you purchase a dongle

and the special methods available on memory cards (see Section 11.2).


Control inputs

DL58

7.1 Additional resources

"Control inputs" and "Control outputs" are available in the Setup menu as additional resources

which you must define.

7.1.1 Control inputs (only with TTLIO)

You can use the parameters of this resource only if you have installed an RS option in the third

slot. The two inputs In 3.1 and In 3.2 of the TTLIO socket are used for the attachment of devices

whose signal should be scanned (see Sections 6.7.5 and 10.7).

If you select this menu and press <F4>, the following appears:

Control inputs (only with TTLIO)

SETUP

Fill level sensor

Esc Add Modify OK

Notes

1. When the titrator is delivered, the English name for the fill level sensor is defined. Should

you wish to store the Spanish name, use the Modify command (see Section 7.1.1.1).

2. If you have added device names to the list, the Delete command appears (<F2>).

7.1.1.1 Modify

Press <F4>, "Modify", to show the parameters of the control input whose name and input you

can change.

Control input parameters

SETUP

Name Fill level sensor

Input In 3.1

Esc Modify OK

Name

You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a new name

from the list of input names which appears.

Input Select with <F4>: "In 3.1" or "In 3.2".


DL58

Control outputs

Storage procedure

The definition of the control input is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask and the

list of names of the control inputs with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored

when you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of

Section 2.1.2).

7.1.1.2 Add

With this command you can add a new device to the list of the defined devices. The following

mask always appears:

Control input parameters

SETUP

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Input In 3.1

Esc Modify OK

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section 7.1.1.1.

If you define, e.g. several devices with the same name, you must provide these with an

additional identification so that the titrator can distinguish them, e.g. Fill level sensor/2. If you

do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).

7.1.2 Control outputs (only with TTLIO)

You can use the parameters of this resource only if you have installed an RS option in the third

slot. The four outputs Out 3.1...Out 3.4 of the TTLIO socket are used for the attachment of, e.g.

dosing equipment (see Sections 6.7.6 and 10.7).

If you select this menu and press <F4>, the following appears:

Control outputs (only with TTLIO)

SETUP

Pump

Dispenser

Valve


Note: When the titrator is delivered, the English name for the stored devices is defined. Should

you wish to store the Spanish name, use the Modify command (see Section 7.1.2.1).


Control outputs

DL58

7.1.2.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the device for the defined output will be deleted from the list.

7.1.2.2 Modify

Press <F4>, "Modify", to show the parameters of the control output whose name and output

you can change.

Control output parameters

SETUP

Name Pump

Output Out 3.1

Esc Modify OK

Name

You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a new name

from the list of output names which appears.

Output Select with <F4>: "Out 3.1", "Out 3.2", "Out 3.3" or Out "3.4".

Storage procedure

The definition of the control output is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask and

the list of names with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when you press

a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of Section 2.1.2).

7.1.2.3 Add

With this command you can add a new device to the list of defined devices. The following mask

always appears:

Control output parameters

SETUP

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Output Out 3.1

Esc Modify OK

You can change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 7.1.2.2.

If you define, e.g. several devices with the same name, you must provide these with an

additional identification so that titrator can distinguish them, e.g. Pump/2. If you do not, a

message appears.


DL58

Special methods

7.2 Special methods

If you press the Method key and scroll the menu downward (Shift and ∇-key), the following

appears:

Methods

METTLER methods

Special methods

METHOD

∇

Print OK

Special methods

METHOD

91001 Surfactant determination

91002 Vitamin C determination

Esc Delete Print Modify

You can change these two special methods to meet your requirements and store them under

a different method ID. Each new method is stored in the "Special methods" group.

7.2.1 Additional commands

You can modify the special method by changing or deleting its functions or by adding new

functions. Virtually all functions can occur more than once in a method.

Special method

Functions

delete

add

Parameters

modify


∇

Special methods

DL58

– Press <F4> when the surfactant determination is selected: The list of functions appears.

Method: 91001

METHOD

Title

Sample

Stir

Esc Add Modify OK

∇

Method: 91001

METHOD

Title

Sample

Stir

Two-phase titration

∇

Esc Add Modify OK

Method: 91001

METHOD

Sample

Stir

Two-phase titration

Calculation

∇


Add

Delete

You can insert a new function after every selected function (see following

page). If you select a wrong order when inserting functions (e.g. you can

not place the EQP titration function before the Sample function), an error

message appears, but not until the method is stored.

You can not delete the Title function as it is used to identify the method

and must always be placed at the head of the functions.

You can not delete the Sample function as it provides the titrator with

information regarding the titration stand at which titration is performed.


DL58

Special methods

If, e.g. Stir is selected and you press <F3>, the list of functions you can add appears:

Stir .............................. (6) see Section 3.3.3

Measure .............................. (10) see Section 3.3.4

Temperature .............................. (10) see Section 7.3.1

Instruction .............................. (10) see Section 7.3.2

Dispense .............................. (6) see Section 3.3.5

Pump .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.3

EQP titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.6

EP titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.7

Learn titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.8

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.9

EP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.10

Two-phase titration .............................. (*) see Section 7.3.4

pH/mV-stat .............................. (2) see Section 3.3.11

Control input .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.5

Control output .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.6

Calculation .............................. (12) see Section 3.3.12

Auxiliary value .............................. (20) see Section 3.3.15

Titer .............................. (1) see Section 3.3.14

Calibration .............................. (1) see Section 3.3.13

Report .............................. (8) see Section 3.3.16

Sync .............................. (20) see Section 7.3.7

– Select the function you wish to add and press <F5>. It will be inserted under the Stir function.

Note: The number in brackets is the maximum possible number of this function a special

method can contain.

(*): A special method can contain maximum 6 titration functions.


Temperature

DL58

7.3 Additional functions

7.3.1 Temperature

You can use this function to measure the temperature of a solution under defined conditions.

The titrator acquires the measured value as raw result T (see Note a. in Section 3.3.4).

Sensor

Temp A

Unit of meas. °C

∆T [°C, °F, K] 0.02

∆t [s] 2.0

t(min) mode

Fix

t(max) [s] 30.0

Sensor

Press <F4> to select the temperature sensor: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C

or TEMP D.

Unit of meas. Press <F4> to select the unit: °C, °F or K.

∆T

∆t

t(min) mode

The temperature drift must be less than ∆T/∆t (0.01 °C/s) during the

period ∆t (2 s) if the temperature is to be acquired as a measured value.

This occurs within a defined time interval t(min) and t(max).

t(min) is earliest time for the acquisition of the measured value. Select

t(min) from the selection menu:

t(min) mode

METHOD

Fix

T > set value

T < set value

Esc

Modify

Fix: With <F4> the mask appears in which you can change t(min).

T greater than set value: Instead of a fixed time you can select a condition:

The measured value must be greater or

T less than set value: less than a specified set value: <F4> is used

to show the mask in which you can enter the

set value [°C, °F, K].

t(max)

is the latest time for the acquisition of the measured value.

If you have selected one of the conditions for t(min), the titrator starts the

next function when the measured temperature T is greater than (less

than) the set value and the drift condition is met, but at the latest after

t(max).


DL58

Instruction/Pump

7.3.2 Instruction

This function allows you to intervene manually in the sequence of the titration method, in other

words the method is interrupted. The entered text appears at the desired position during the

current method in the display. The method does not continue until you confirm the instruction

with Run.

Instruction

METHOD

Text

Text

Text

Esc

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

OK

Text

Enter the desired instruction.

7.3.3 Pump

With the aid of this function you can add solvent with a pump attached to the sample changer.

Pump

METHOD

Solvent

H 2 O

Volume [mL] 10

Stir

No

Esc Modify OK

Solvent

Volume

Stir

With <F4> select the solvent from the list which contains those you have

defined in the Setup menu (see Section 2.8).

Enter the volume that should be added. You have defined the pump rate

of the device in the Setup menu.

Select whether (Yes) or not (No) stirring should be effected during the

dosing operation.


Two-phase titration

DL58

7.3.4 Two-phase titration

This section explains the first 4 parameter groups of this titration function. The explanations

for those of the group Recognition, Termination and Evaluation can be found in Sections

3.3.6.5 through 3.3.6.7.

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation

The titrator records several measured values and volumes as raw results (see Section 8.1).



Titrant

Hyamine


Sensor

DP550

Unit of meas.

mV

Titrant

Concentration

Sensor

Unit of measurement











DL58

Two-phase titration


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of two predispensing modes


Predispensing

METHOD

to volume


No

Esc

Modify

Volume

Factor x

sample size

No





Notice: The wait time includes the time of the dosing operation!



you press <F4>.

You can also enter a wait time (see "Volume").


The titrator adds the volume in one step. It adopts the potential values

ET1 and ET2.

E [mV]

ET1: Potential at the start of predispensing

or the titration

ET2: Potential after predispensing

ET2

ET1

V [mL]


Two-phase titration

DL58


For the two-phase titration, only the incremental addition mode is available.

Titrant addition

METHOD

∆V [mL] 0.05

Esc

OK

∆V

The volume increment that the titrator adds is constant (see Section

3.3.6.3: Incremental titrant addition).


You define the duration of the mixing and separation time as well as the stirrer speed during

the separation time.

Measure mode

Mixing time [s] 15.0

Separation time [s] 50.0

Stirrer speed (sepn time) [%] 10

Esc

METHOD

OK

Mixing time

Separation

time

After the addition of every increment, the two phases are stirred for this

time at the speed selected in the Stirrer function.

During this time, the two phases should separate so that a stable

measured value of the corresponding phase can then be acquired.

Stirrer speed You can set your "own" speed for the separation time or set it to 0.

Note: If you use the auxiliary function Stirrer to

• change the speed during the mixing time, this applies only to the

mixing time during the two-phase titration and for any functions

after the two-phase titration.

• change the speed during the separation time, this applies only

to the separation time during the two-phase titration.


DL58

Control input

7.3.5 Control input

With this function you can influence the progress of a method externally via the inputs of the

TTLIO socket. This is possible only with an RS option installed in the third slot (see Section

10.7). The titrator waits for the defined signal to be detected or the maximum time to elapse

before it processes the next function.

Control input

METHOD

Name

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Input signal Rising

Max. time [s] 10.0

Esc Modify OK

Name

Input signal

Max. time

With <F4> open the list containing the names of the inputs you have

defined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.1). Confirm the one you wish

to use with OK.

With Rising or Falling you specify the direction of change of the input

signal when the signal you have defined is detected.

This time defines the wait time for detection of the signal. On elapse of this

time, processing of the method continues even if no signal has been

detected.


Control output

DL58

7.3.6 Control output

With this function you can generate TTL signals. This is possible only with an RS option

installed in the third slot (see Section 10.7). The nature of the signal depends on the control

mode you have selected. The standard status of the control outputs is "high".

Control output

METHOD

Name

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Control mode Fixed time

Instruction

Esc Modify OK

Name

Control mode

With <F4> open the list containing the names of the outputs you have

defined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.2). Confirm the one you wish

to use with OK.

The mode determines the number and nature of the generated TTL

signals. The following modes are possible (press <F4> ): "Fixed time",

"On/Off", "Input controlled" or "Sequential".

Fixed time

Select this mode when you wish to operate a device that is attached to the

control output over a fixed time period.

– Enter the time during which the control output should be switched on.

On/Off

With this mode you can, e.g. switch on a device attached to the control

output at the start of the method and switch it off at the end of the method.

– Select whether the control output should be switched on or off. The

status of the control output will be automatically set to off on completion

of the method.

Input controlled

This mode allows a device attached to the control output to be switched

on or off by a device attached to the control input (e.g. pushbutton). The

function is ended when the signal at the defined control input changes or

after elapse of a maximum time.


DL58

Control output

Control mode

Input controlled

METHOD

Name

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Output signal Normal

Max. time [s] 10.0

Esc Modify OK

Name: With <F4> open the list containing the names of the inputs you

have defined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.1). Use OK to confirm

the one which should control the control output function.

Output signal "Normal": The signal is routed directly from the control

input to the control output.

Output signal "Inverted": The signal of the control input is first inverted

and then routed to the control output.

Max. time: The maximum time defines the wait time for the signal change.

On elapse of this time, the method is processed further even if no signal

has been sent.

Sequential

Use this mode to select devices which you can use to either trigger

various actions through different sequences or repeat particular actions

through single pulses of the sequence (see Section 6.7.6).

Sequential

Number of pulses 10

Pulse duration [s] 1.0

Interval [s] 1.0

Esc

METHOD

OK

Number of pulses: Enter the number of pulses of the desired sequence.

Pulse duration: Enter the time during which a pulse should be switched

on.

Interval: Enter the wait time between the pulses.

Instruction

You can enter a text which is shown while the function is active.


Sync

DL58

7.3.7 Sync

Under this function you specify the parameters for the synchronization of the titrator with an

external control unit. The synchronization takes place via the system interface (RS option in

the slot 3!).

Sync

METHOD

Sync mode Send

Code 1

Comment

Esc Modify OK

Sync mode

Code

Comment

Press <F4> to select: "Send" or "Send/Wait".

Send: The titrator transmits the numeric code you have defined to the

external control unit and then begins to process the next method function

immediately.

Send/Wait: The titrator transmits the numeric code you have defined to

the external control unit and then waits until this sends back the same

code. Only then does the titrator start to process the next method function.

Enter a number between 1 and 32, which is sent to the external control

unit.

Enter a comment, which appears on the display when the function is

executed.

Notes

1. You will find additional information regarding the communication between the titrator and

the external control unit in the Operating Instructions "DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58: RS232C

Interface Description".

2. Two titrators can also be synchronized by means of the system interface using the Sync

function. You must then connect the two titrators using a null modem.


Symbols and explanations

Contents

Page

8. Symbols and explanations ........................................................................ 8-3

8.1 List of symbols ........................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.1 Compilation of the raw results ...................................................................... 8-8

8.2 Use of indices ............................................................................................. 8-9

8.2.1 Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms ............................................. 8-12

8.3 Evaluation procedures .............................................................................. 8-14

8.3.1 Standard....................................................................................................... 8-14

8.3.2 Minimum/maximum ...................................................................................... 8-14

8.3.3 Segmented ................................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.4 Asymmetric .................................................................................................. 8-16

8.4 Examples of formulas ................................................................................ 8-17

8.4.1 Results ......................................................................................................... 8-17

8.4.2 Constants ..................................................................................................... 8-18

8.4.3 Formulas for restriction of the equivalence point ......................................... 8-19

8.5 Restrictions in the analysis....................................................................... 8-20

8.5.1 Maximum number of samples ........................................................................8-20

8.5.2 Maximum number of sample series in the sample data memory ................. 8-20

8.5.3 Maximum number of equivalence points per sample determination ............ 8-20

8.5.4 Maximum number of measured values per Titration function ...................... 8-20

8.5.5 Maximum number of results per sample series ........................................... 8-20

8.5.6 How long does the titrator store data? ......................................................... 8-20



List of symbols

8. Symbols and explanations

In this section you will find additional information which supplements Sections 3 to 7.

8.1 List of symbols

This list shows you the abbreviations of all symbols of the parameters and the raw results

determined by the titrator together with their definition. If you enter the symbols using an

external keyboard, you must comply with the uppercase or lowercase notation.

Function/Resource Symbol Definition

Titrant c Nominal concentration of the titrant in mol/L

t

Titer of the titrant

N

c * t: actual equivalent concentration of the titrant

in mol/L (ACTUAL value); it is calculated automatically

by the titrator.

Sensor ZERO Zero point of the pH electrode

SLOPE Slope of the pH electrode

Auxiliary value H Auxiliary value : H1 to H20

Sample

(Sample data)

m Sample size of the weight in g or volume in mL (for

Calculation function)

M

Molar mass in g/mol

z

Equivalent number: Number of reaction entities

compared to the titrant

Note: For technical reasons, the notation z* of DIN

standard 32 625 has not been used for the titrator.

f

Correction factor

Current sample TIME Time of a sample determination in seconds


List of symbols

Function Symbol Definition

EQP titration

Learn titration

EP titration(Ipol/Upol)

ET1 Initial potential of the measured solution before the

first addition of titrant in the defined unit of the

sensor used


ET2 Potential after predispensing in the defined unit of

the sensor used

Two-phase titration*

VEQ Titrant consumption in mL up to the equivalence

point or end point; the equivalence points are

numbered consecutively

Q Titrant consumption in mmol up to the equivalence

point or end point; the equivalence points are

numbered consecutively. Q = VEQ * c * t

VEX Calculated excess of titrant in mL

QEX Calculated excess of titrant in mmol

VEND Total titrant consumption in mL (VEQ + VEX)

QEND Total titrant consumption in mmol (Q + QEX)

EPOT Calculated equivalence point potential of the equivalence

or end point VEQ in the defined unit of the

sensor used

EQP titration EHNV Calculated half neutralization value (potential at


VEQ/2) referred to the equivalence point VEQ in

the defined unit of the sensor used


neq Number of equivalence points found (applies to

one Titration function)

P1 Potential 1 in the defined unit of the sensor used

(evaluation parameter)

P2 Potential 2 in the defined unit of the sensor used

(evaluation parameter)

VP1 Titrant consumption in mL up to potential P1

VP2 or potential P2

QP1 Titrant consumption in mmol up to potential P1

QP2 or potential P2

* Two-phase titration: Special methods


List of symbols

Predispensing to

a: Volume or

(factor x sample size)

b: Potential

c: Slope

Example of an EQP titration

with 3 equivalence points

E [mV]

EPOT3

EHNV3

EPOT2

EHNV2

EPOT1

EHNV1

E [mV]

neq = 3

2

1

VEQ1 VEQ2

VEQ3

Q1 Q2 Q3

VEND

QEND

3

VEX

QEX

V [mL]

+200

P1

+100

0

-100

-200

P2

VP1/QP1

VP2/QP2

V [mL]

Example of an EQP titration

with evaluation of the defined

potential values


List of symbols


pH/mV-stat VTOT Total titrant consumption in mL

QTOT Total titrant consumption in mmol

VT1 Titrant consumption in mL up to time limit t1

VT2 or time limit t2

VT

Titrant consumption in mL up to a different time

limit

QT1 Titrant consumption in mmol up to time limit t1

QT2 or time limit t2

QT Titrant consumption in mmol up to a different time

limit

CSTAT Correlation coefficient of the regression lines between

t1 and t2 of the V – t curve

VSTAT Mean titrant consumption in mL/min within the

time limits t1 and t2

QSTAT Mean titrant consumption in mmol/min within the

time limits t1 and t2

V [mL]

∆V/∆t V/t [mL/s]

VTOT

QTOT

VT2

QT2

VT1

QT1

VSTAT

QSTAT

t1

t2

t [s]

t1

t2

t [s]

Note: VSTAT/QSTAT is determined by means of linear regression of the measured values

between t1 and t2. CSTAT is the correlation coefficient of this linear regression. For a

correct result, CSTAT should be greater than 0.95.


List of symbols


Measure E Measured value in mV or in the defined unit of the

sensor used (does not apply to polarized sensors)

Dispense VDISP Total dispensed volume in mL

QDISP Total dispensed amount of substance in mmol

Calculation R Calculated result

C

Calculation constant

Cx

Calculation constant (applies only to the auxiliary

function "Perform calculations")

x

Mean value of the statistics evaluation (calculated

only when the Statistics parameter is defined)

s

Standard deviation

srel Relative standard deviation in %

Temperature* T Measured temperature in °C, °F or K of the Pt

sensor used

* Temperature: Special methods


List of symbols

8.1.1 Compilation of the raw results

Analysis/Function Raw results Printed out when "Raw

results" is selected in the

report function

Current sample TIME no

Measure E yes

Dispense VDISP, QDISP yes

EQP/EP titration ET1, ET2 no

Learn titration

VEQ, Q

yes

EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

VEX, QEX

yes


VEND, QEND

no

EPOT

yes

EQP titration EHNV no

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) neq

no


P1, P2 yes

VP1, QP1

yes

VP2, QP2

yes

pH/mV-stat VTOT, QTOT yes

VT1, QT1

no

VT2, QT2

no

VT, QT

no

VSTAT, QSTAT

yes

CSTAT

no

Temperature* T yes

Notes:

1. * Two-phase titration, Temperature: Special methods

2. To obtain the raw results which are not printed out as standard, assign these to the result

R, e.g. R = QP1, R = VT1.


Use of indices

8.2 Use of indices

As some functions can occur a number of times within a method and parameters can also

appear a number of times within a function, indices are needed in addition to the parameter

symbol (see Section 8.2.1: Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms).

The titrator recognizes 4 different indexing forms:

1. Parameters without index

These parameters include, e.g. c, t, M, ZERO, SLOPE, TIME. The parameters always refer

to the current titrant, the current sensor or the current sample determination.

The parameters of the functions which occur only once within the standard methods also

do not need an index, e.g. E of the Measure function or VSTAT of the pH/mV-stat function.

2. Parameters of the form Xi

Parameters which use an index without brackets are all those whose link with the method

function is meaningless. This indexing form includes R, C and H.

Example: R3: third result (see fourth indexing form)

Note: R = R1 holds, in other words if the index = 1 it may be omitted. This also applies to

the indexing forms under points 3 and 4.

3. Parameters of the form X [j]

Index j is the function counter. This indexing form includes, e.g. VDISP, QEX and x.

Example: QDISP[2]: Measured value of the second Dispense function (extract from

standard method "2 Step titration (EQP)")

Dispense

Stir

After confirmation of the "Current sample", the titrator dispenses

and determines the raw result QDISP of the first Dispense function.

The titrator executes the Stir function, then

EQP titration

the EQP titration followed by the

Calculation

Calculation

first calculation function. To obtain the measured value QDISP as

a result, set R1 = QDISP[1].

The titrator executes the second calculation function, then


Use of indices

Report

the Report function before

Dispense

Stir

it dispenses again and determines the raw result QDISP of the

second Dispense function.

The titrator runs the second Stir function, then

EQP titration

the second EQP titration, followed by the

Calculation

third Calculation function. To obtain the measured value QDISP

as a result, set R3 = QDISP[2].

4. Parameters of the form Xi [j]

Index i is the number of times a parameter should be run within a function. Index j is the

counter for the number of functions within a method. This indexing form includes Q, VEQ,

EHNV and EPOT.

Example: Q2[2]: mmol consumption up to the second equivalence point of the second

EQP titration function. Extract from the standard method "2 Step titration

(EQP)", which has been adapted for the determination of HCl, CH 3 COOH

and NH 4 Cl with NaOH. (The 2 titration functions were selected as other

values have been defined for the equilibrium controlled measured value

acquisition in the determination of CH 3 COOH and NH 4 Cl.)

EQP titration

E [mV]

The titrator executes the first EQP

titration function and titrates until the

equivalence point of HCl. It determines,

among other things, the mmol

consumption Q1[1] and the mmol

excess QEX[1].

EQP1

Q1[1] ≡ Q

QEX[1] ≡ QEX.

V [mL]

Q1[1]

QEX[1]


Use of indices

Calculation

Formula .................................. R1 = Q1[1]

Constant.................................

Decimal places ...................... 4

Result unit .............................. mmol

Result name ........................... HCl

Statistics................................. Yes

In the first Calculation function, you

define the mmol consumption for

HCl.

As you can omit the Index 1, the

formula can also be R = Q.

EQP titration

E [mV]

EQP1

The titrator executes the second

EQP titration function. It determines,

among other things, the mmol consumption

Q1[2] up to the first equivalence

point (CH 3 COOH), then the

mmol consumption Q2[2] up to the

second equivalence point (NH 4 Cl).

EQP2

V [mV]

Q1[2]

Q2[2]

Calculation

Formula .................................. R2 = Q1[2]+QEX[1]

Constant.................................

Decimal places ...................... 4

Result unit .............................. mmol

Result name ........................... CH 3 COOH

Statistics................................. Yes

In the second (third) Calculation function,

you define the mmol consumption

for acetic acid.

Here, you take into account the titrated

excess of the first EQP titration

function.

Calculation

Formula .................................. R3 = Q2[2]

Constant.................................

Decimal places ...................... 4

Result unit .............................. mmol

Result name ........................... NH 4 Cl

Statistics................................. Yes

In the third (fourth) Calculation function

you define the mmol consumption

for NH 4 Cl.

Note: The two Dispense functions of the standard method are skipped (0 mL has been defined

as volume in the method); the second Calculation function is skipped (no formula has

been defined in the method for the result).


Use of indices

8.2.1 Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms

Analysis/Resource / Symbol Unit Index Examples

Function

Current sample TIME [s]

Titrant c [mol/L]

t

Sensor ZERO [mV, pH ...]

SLOPE [mV/ mV, pH ...]

– –

Sample m [g] or [mL]

M

[g/mol]

z

f

Auxiliary value H H1…H20

Calculation R Xi R3

C

C2

Measure** E [mV, pH ...]

Temperature* T [°C, °F, K]

Dispense VDISP [mL]

QDISP [mmol] X[j] QDISP[2]

EQP/EP titration ET1 [mV, pH, µA...]

EQP/EP titration

ET2 [mV, pH, µA...]

(Ipol/Upol)** VEX [mL]


QEX [mmol] QEX[2]

VEND [mL]

QEND [mmol]


Use of indices

Function Symbol Unit Index Examples

EQP titration neq neq[3]

EQP titration(Ipol/Upol)** P1

[mV, pH, µA...]

Two-phase titration* VP1 [mL]

QP1 [mmol]

P2

[mV, pH, µA...]

VP2 [mL]

QP2 [mmol]

EP titration VEQ [mL]

EP titration (Ipol/Upol)** Q [mmol] Q[2]

EPOT [mV, pH, µA...]

pH/mV-stat** VTOT [mL]

X[j]

QTOT [mmol]

VT1 [mL] VT1[2]

QT1 [mmol]

VT2 [mL]

QT2 [mmol]

VSTAT [mL/min]

QSTAT [mmol/min]

CSTAT

Calculation x x[3]

(Statistics)

s

srel

EQP titration VEQ [mL]

EQP titration(Ipol/Upol)** Q [mmol] Q2[1]

Two-phase titration* EPOT [mV, pH, µA ...] Xi[j] EPOT1[2]

EHNV [mV, pH, µA ...]

Note:

The parameters of the functions which occur only once in a method do not need an

index in "[ ]".

* Temperature, Two-phase titration: Special methods;

** Measure, pH/mV-stat, EQP titration (Ipol/Upol), EP titration (Ipol/Upol): two or more

of these functions are possible only with special methods.


Evaluation procedures

8.3 Evaluation procedures

The titrator has various evaluation procedures for precise determination of the equivalence

points of a titration curve:

• Standard

• Minimum/maximum

• Segmented

• Asymmetric

8.3.1 Standard

You use this procedure for all S-shaped titration curves. The evaluation uses an iterative

procedure (nonlinear regression) [1]. The titration of a strong acid with a strong base is used

as a mathematical model. With this model, the determined equivalence point always lies in the

vicinity of the inflection point.

E

Inflection point

At least five measured points around

the the inflection point are used for the

evaluation. The slope from measured

point to measured point must increase

or decrease. If this condition is not met,

the iterative procedure can not be employed.

In such a case, the inflection

point of the titration curve is determined

by interpolation. A reference to

this effect appears in the report of the

"raw results".

V

8.3.2 Minimum/maximum

The result of this evaluation is the calculated minimum (maximum) from the measured points

of the titration. The classical example of a titration curve with a minimum is the determination

of surfactants with photometric indication.

The minimum (maximum) is calculated by a polynomial approximation of the titration curve in

the region of the minimum (maximum). The equivalence point is recognized directly using the

data of the titration curve.



8.3.3 Segmented

Different indication methods (e.g. photometry, conductometry and amperometry) generate

titration curves with linear or approximately linear segments (segmented curves). The titrator

also evaluates these curves. The evaluation procedure used is based on the following

consideration:

E

∆E/∆V

∆ 2 E/∆V 2

Titration Titrierkurve curve

V

1st derivative

1. Ableitung

V

2nd derivative 2. Ableitung

V

The first derivative of a segmented

curve has the typical shape of an S-

shaped curve, its inflection point represents

a good approximation of the

equivalence point.

Segmented curves are evaluated with

the Standard procedure, which uses

the calculated data of the first derivative

instead of the data points of the

titration curve.

The equivalence point recognition is

thus effected not with the calculated

first derivative but with the calculated

second derivative. The threshold for

the equivalence point recognition also

refers to data of the second derivative.

The individual segments do not need

to be exactly linear. Decisive for an

accurate determination of the equivalence

point is the presence of a clear

kink between the individual segments

of the titration curves.



8.3.4 Asymmetric

With pronounced asymmetric curves, the standard procedure can lead to a systematic error.

The difference between the true equivalence point and the inflection point can then be greater

than the precision normally attained. For these cases, the titrator is equipped with the evaluation

based on the Tubbs method [2].

This empirical approximation method is a tried and tested procedure for the evaluation of

asymmetric, analog recorded titration curves. It can also be applied to titration curves

measured digitally. The result of the Tubbs evaluation provides a better approximation of the

true equivalence point than the inflection point.

The evaluation procedure is based on the following considerations:

E

M

1

M

2

Intersection

point EQP

V

A circle of curvature with minimum radius

can be drawn on both branches of the

titration curve. The ratio of the two radii

is determined by the asymmetry of the

curve. The mean intersection point of

the line connecting the centers of the

circles M1 and M2 with the titration curve

represents the sought-after equivalence

point. Theoretical calculations show that

the true equivalence point with asymmetric

titration curves always lies between

the inflection point and that branch

of the titration curve which has the greater

curvature (the smaller radius of curvature).

In the titrator the calculation is implemented according to Ebel [3]. This involves approximating

those parts of the titration curve which lie in the region of the greatest curvature by a hyperbola.

The vertex is determined for each approximated hyperbola. This point on the hyperbola lies

at the site of greatest curvature. The mid-points of the assigned smallest radii of curvature are

the focal points of the two hyperbolae. As in the graphical variant, the intersection point of the

line connecting the two focal points with the titration curve results in the required equivalence

point.

For the evaluation at least six measured points both before and after the inflection point of the

titration curve are required in the region of the greatest curvature. If the titration curve has a

profile which does not allow calculation of the radii of curvature, the titrator calculates the

equivalence point by the standard procedure. This will be indicated in the report of the "raw

results".

[1] K. Waldmeier and W. Rellstab, Fres.Z.Anal.Chem., 264, 337, (1973)

[2] C.F. Tubbs, Anal. Chem., 26, 1670 (1954)

[3] S. Ebel, E. Glaser, R. Kantelberg and B. Reyer, Fres. Z. Anal. Chem., 312, 604 (1982)


Examples of formulas

8.4 Examples of formulas

8.4.1 Results

R = Q ∗ C / m (standard formula) Content of a sample with weighing

C = f (M, z, unit) % – ppm, – mg / g, – TAN [mg KOH / g], –

mol / kg, – mmol / g

Content of a sample solution

% (g/mL), – g / L, – ppm, – mg / L, – g / 100mL,

mol / L, – mmol / L

R = m / (VEQ ∗ c ∗ C)

R = Q ∗ C

R = Q

R = VEQ

R = VEQ / m

R = (QDISP – Q) ∗ C / m

R = (Q – Hj) ∗ C / m

R = (Q / m – Hj) ∗ C

R = ET1 [2]

R = pw(–E) ∗ 1000

R = lg(–E)

Titer determined with primary standard

Titer determined with volumetric standard

Content per sample

mmol consumption as result

mL consumption as result

mL consumption per unit weight or per unit volume

as result

Back titration:

QDISP: dispensed amount of substance in mmol of

the Dispense function

Q: mmol consumption up to the equivalence point

or end point of an EQP or EP titration function.

Solvent blank value included in the calculation

(blank value is stored as auxiliary value Hj )

Matrix blank value included in the calculation

[mmol / g] (matrix blank value is stored as auxiliary

value Hj)

Initial potential of the second EQP or EP titration

function as result

Ion concentration in mmol/L, measured with an ionselective

electrode

Extinction of a solution, measured as % transmission

with a phototrode



8.4.2 Constants

Weight or volume of the sample known

C = M / z

Unit

mg / g or g/L

C = M / (10 ∗ z) %

C = M / (z ∗ 10 ∗ ρ) ... (ρ = density of the solution)

C = M ∗ 1000 / z

% (g/100 mL)

ppm (mg/kg)

C = M ∗ 1000 / (z ∗ ρ)...(ρ = density of the solution) ppm (mg / L)

C = 1 / z mol / kg (mmol / g)

C = 56.1 TAN and TBN (mg KOH / g)

C = M / (1000 ∗ z)

C = 1000

C = 1

Titer

mmol / L

mol / L

Volume and weight of the sample unknown

C = M / z

C = 1 / z

mg

mmol



8.4.3 Formulas for restriction of the equivalence point

To calculate the titrant consumption in mmol of a particular equivalence point when a titration

curve has several equivalence points, you can have Q identified by a condition, e.g.

R1 = Q(EPOT > -50)

R1 = Q(EPOT > -50)[2]

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ 100)[2]

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ P1)

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ H11)

R1 = Q(P1 < EPOT < 300)

Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 1st

EQP titration function whose potential is above -50 mV. Here,

the equivalence point which first meets this condition is determined.

Equivalence points whose potential lies between, e.g.

-51 and -300 mV are not considered.

Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 2nd

EQP titration function whose potential lies above -50 mV.

Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 2nd

EQP titration function whose potential is nearest to 100 mV.


EQP titration whose potential is nearest to potential P1.


EQP titration function whose value is nearest to the value

stored under auxiliary value H11.


EQP titration lying within the range of potential P1 and 300 mV.

The equivalence point which first meets this condition is determined.

Note: You can also define these conditions with VEQ or EPOT, e.g. R 1= EPOT(VEQ ~ 5).


Restrictions

8.5 Restrictions in the analysis

8.5.1 Maximum number of samples

The sample data of maximum 60 samples can be entered.

8.5.2 Maximum number of sample series in the sample data memory

DL50/DL53:

DL55/DL58:

Maximum 1 sample series can be entered.

Maximum 3 sample series can be entered.

8.5.3 Maximum number of equivalence points per sample determination

Per sample determination, the titrator can determine maximum 16 equivalence points (EQP

titration), divided between one or two EQP titration functions. If there are more than 16

equivalence points, these will not be determined, but the determination will be continued.

8.5.4 Maximum number of measured values per Titration function

The titrator can store 300 measured values per titration function (EQP, EP, Learn, EQP (Ipol/

Upol), Two-phase); it then aborts the function. With the titration functions EP (Ipol/Upol) and

pH/mV-stat, the number of measured points will be reduced automatically (see Sections

3.3.10 and 3.3.11).

8.5.5 Maximum number of results per sample series

The titrator can store 180 results per sample series; it then aborts the series.

Example: If you titrate 40 samples with a method, the titrator can store 4 results for each

individual sample.

8.5.6 How long does the titrator store data?

1. Measured values of the titration functions

The titrator stores the measured values up to the next titration function or up to the start of

the next sample determination.

2. Raw results

The titrator stores all raw results up to the titration of the next sample within a series.

3. Results

The titrator stores all results of a sample series up to the start of a new series.


Error messages and malfunctions

Contents

Page

9. Error messages and malfunctions .......................................................... 9-3

9.1 Error messages from the titrator ............................................................. 9-3

9.2 Other errors and malfunctions ................................................................ 9-6





9. Error messages and malfunctions

9.1 Error messages from the titrator

You yourself can rectify all errors which the titrator displays as messages. Some of these

messages refer to this section (errors 1...6).

However, if the EPROM or RAM test following startup of the titrator failed ("test failed"), the only

measure available is: "Press any key to continue". The program memory or the program data

memory is faulty.

After any key has been pressed, the titrator attempts to continue the startup process: This may

be successful, but does not necessarily guarantee 100% perfect operation.

Measure: Please contact METTLER TOLEDO service!

1. Internal ERROR: ... ← (error which should be noted down, e.g. PB, M1)

Parts of the hardware may be faulty.

Measure: – Before you contact METTLER TOLEDO service,

• note the fault and the operation which initiated it,

• note the instrument number of the titrator (rear panel)

• print out the system information, which provides details of the titrator

equipment:

– Press the shift and <F4> keys to print out the information.

• Finally, inform the service of these points and the attached peripherals with

the defined configuration.

2. Memory faulty

Parts of the user data memory are faulty.

Measure: – Call METTLER TOLEDO service to have the memory changed. Meanwhile,

you can still continue working with the titrator.

3. Faulty data deleted

a. The titrator has stored only parts of a method, e.g. as the power failed during storage

of this method. It deletes the entire method (it is also possible that it has deleted several

methods). As a result, the sample data of this method which are stored in the sample

data memory will also be deleted.

Measure: – Confirm the message.

– Check which of your methods have been deleted and reenter.



3 b. The titrator has stored only parts of parameters of a resource, e.g. as the power failed

during storage of these parameters. It deletes the entire list of this resource (e.g. all

titrants or all sensors).


The titrator now loads the default list of the deleted resource, e.g. all

titrants stored in the titrator in the factory.

– Check which list has been changed:

If the user data memory has insufficient storage space, only the titrants

which can be accommodated in the available space will be stored.

If the memory is full, the titrator will not store any titrants. In such a case,

you must delete data of other resources or one of your methods to create

memory space.

– Switch the titrator off then on again.

– Check that all resources are again available.

If the error messages appears repeatedly, inform METTLER TOLEDO service!

4. Storage not possible

a. The titrator can not assign the titer, the auxiliary value or the calibration data to the

corresponding resources as the list is missing (titrant, sensors or auxiliary values).


– Check whether the list of the resource has been deleted.

– Switch the titrator off then on again: The titrator will then reload the default

list of the corresponding resource, e.g. all the titrants which were stored

in the titrator in the factory.

If the user data memory has insufficient storage space, only the titrants

which can fit in the available space will be stored.

If the memory is full, the titrator will not store any titrants. In such a case,

you must delete other resources or one of your methods to create

storage space.

– Switch the titrator off then on again.

– Check that all resources are again available.

b. The titrator can no longer store, e.g. data as the user data memory is full. This is

possible

• with resources which you wish to add in the Setup menu

• in the case of a method you generate in the Method menu

• with sample data you wish to enter in the Sample menu

• on storage of a changed, active method

• on storage of the evaluation parameters of the titration functions EQP, EQP (Ipol,

Upol) and Two-phase of an active method (parameter: "Stop for reevaluation").




– Delete methods or resource data or copy to a memory card.

4 c. The titrator performs a learn titration. If the method for this is stored on the memory

card or in the computer, the parameters of the function are not stored.


– Always perform a learn titration with a method stored in the titrator and

do not remote-control the titrator!

If the error message appears repeatedly, contact METTLER TOLEDO service!

5. Error: Memory card

a. An error appears during copying.


– Check that the card is inserted properly and restart the copying process.

– If the process is aborted again, reformat the memory card and attempt

to repeat the copying process (the data on the card will be deleted).

– If the process is again aborted, use a new memory card.

b. An error appears when a memory copy is loaded.


– Check that the card is inserted properly and restart the copying process.

– If the process is again aborted, switch the titrator off then on again.

– Use a new memory card.

6. Measuring inputs not adjusted (refers only to a pH option on which the calibration

data are not stored, see Section 6.7.2).

The calibration data for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs are missing.

Measure: – Enter the data from the data sheet enclosed with the pH option (see Section

6.7.2).

When the measuring inputs are adjusted, this message appears if system data have been

deleted in the user data memory.

Measure: – Switch titrator off then on again: the system data will be reloaded.

– Reenter zero point and slope for all measuring inputs.



9.2 Other errors and malfunctions

The following compilation of errors and malfunctions are not reported by the titrator and may

frequently help you rectify the faults yourself without the need to contact METTLER TOLEDO

service.

If you have to contact the service, please print out the system information to obtain details of

the titrator equipment and pass these data on to the service:

– Press the Shift and <F4> keys to print out the information.

Fault Possible cause Rectification

No display on titrator Titrator not connected to power Connect to power supply,

supply

if fault persists contact

METTLER TOLEDO Service

Several points of the display

missing

Contact METTLER TOLEDO

Service

Display does not match the

pressed key

Contact METTLER TOLEDO

Service

Stirrer does not rotate Stirrer not properly assembled Check stirrer and seating of

or sensors block it at the

the sensors

titration stand

Transfer error to attached Peripheral faulty or switched Check attached device is

peripheral off functioning properly

Device (printer, balance, Device not switched on Switch on device

terminal) at Centronics or

RS interface do not react Wrong settings Settings and

Configuration (switch settings) configuration must match

wrong (see Section 2.7)

Burette does not move to Burette drive faulty Contact METTLER TOLEDO

zero position when switched on

service

Wrong potential or Electrode faulty Check electrode (see

pH values

electrode data sheet)

Calibration data wrong

Check defined data

Use new electrode

No dispensing, the titrant Burette tip clogged Clean burette tip

is discharged from stopcock

or piston Follower cam on burette Insert follower cam correctly

mounted wrongly (see Section 10.2.3)


Installation and maintenance


Contents

Page

10. Installation and maintenance ......................................................................10-3

10.1 Installing the burette drive ..........................................................................10-3

10.2 Installing and maintaining the interchangeable burette...........................10-4

10.2.1 The DV1001, DV1005, DV1010, DV1020 burettes ........................................10-4

10.2.2 Equipping the burette .....................................................................................10-5

10.2.3 Inserting the burette .......................................................................................10-6

10.2.4 Maintaining the burette parts..........................................................................10-7

10.2.5 General information........................................................................................10-8

10.3 Equipping the titration stand ......................................................................10-9

10.4 Rear view of the titrator .............................................................................10-10

10.5 Installing the sensor, Centronics or RS option ....................................... 10-11

10.5.1 Calibration data for the characteristic curve of the measuring inputs ..........10-12

10.6 Inserting the memory card ........................................................................10-12

10.7 Using TTL inputs and outputs ..................................................................10-13

10.8 Attaching a keyboard.................................................................................10-15

10.8.1 Attaching a bar-code reader.........................................................................10-16

10.9 Configuration of the terminal (DEC VT340) .............................................10-16



Burette drive

10. Installation and maintenance

– Switch the titrator off and disconnect the power cable before you open the

housing! An electric shock could be lethal.

– You can clean the housing of the titrator with a cloth moistened with ethanol.

10.1 Installing the burette drive

Position 2

Screw

– Unscrew the burette guide at position 2.

– Pull out the ribbon cable that is located in the titrator

below this second opening.

Note

Please place the burette drive on the second opening.

DL50/DL53

The burette drive is defined as the middle position by the software

(drive 2), in other words you can not control a drive installed at

position 1.

DL55/DL58

For the first titration, which you perform in accordance with the

instructions in the Quick Guide, the 2nd burette drive is defined.

– Plug the coupling of the ribbon cable in the connector

of the burette drive.

Coupling

Connector

Ribbon cable

Ribbon cable

– Position the burette drive on the second opening of

the titrator – from the first opening press the ribbon

cable downward at an angle (ensure it is not pinched!)

– and fasten with the screw.

– Screw the burette guide to the first opening.

DL55/DL58

If you wish to use a second burette drive, follow the

above procedure:

– Unscrew the burette guide at position 1 etc.


Interchangeable burette


10.2 Installing and maintaining the interchangeable burette

10.2.1 The DV1001, DV1005, DV1010, DV1020 burettes

The 5, 10 and 20 mL burettes differ only in the size of their cylinder, centering ring and piston,

whereas the 1 mL burette has a different construction: its piston is longer, piston guide and

cylinder holder ''replace'' the centering ring of the other burettes. Instead of the locking screw,

its glass cylinder is fastened with an O-ring and a knurled nut.

1 mL burette 5 / 10 / 20 mL burette

Connection tubing

Knurled nut

O-ring

Stopcock

Stopcock

Cylinder holder

Locking screw

Glass cylinder

Piston

Piston rod

Piston guide

Protection tube

Piston

Piston rod

Burette housing

Lip seals

Centering

ring




10.2.2 Equipping the burette

– Lay gasket on bottle and screw on burette holder.

– Insert stopper (or a drying tube with holder).

Caution: If you use a stopper as protection for the titrant, always use the stopper with flat

side! Otherwise a partial vacuum forms in the bottle (order no. 23646).

– Push suction tubing into the bottle, slide the red PVC tubing over the fitting as kink protection,

and fasten other end to left connection of burette head.

– Screw dispensing tubing into connection at right and place burette tip in tip holder.

Suction tube

Dispensing tube

Tip

holder

Burette

assembled

Burette holder

Stopper

Gasket

1 L bottle

Fitting




10.2.3 Inserting the burette

2

3

1

– Slide the burette onto burette drive 2 with

the stop of arrestment knob (1) located on

left side.

– Check that piston rod (2) is correctly positioned

in push rod (3).

– Fix burette by turning the arrestment knob

to the right.

Note

Before sliding the burette onto the titrator,

check the exact position of the stopcock and

the piston rod.

If the piston has been pushed too far into the

cylinder, carefully take it out a short way. Then

press the burette onto the burette holder thus

positioning the piston exactly. Piston must

project 7 mm!

Position of the

valve

Position of the

piston




10.2.4 Maintaining the burette parts

Depending on the titrant, you should clean the burette cylinder, piston, stopcock and tubing

relatively often.

– Slide the burette off the titrator, invert it so that the stopcock points towards you and carefully

take out the piston; this causes the burette contents to flow out through the suction tubing

(waste or titrant bottle!).

– In the same position, turn the stopcock through 90° clockwise and any liquid in the stopcock

will flow out through the dispensing tubing (waste bottle!).

– Unscrew the suction, dispensing and connection tubing.

1 mL burette

– Unscrew the knurled screw of the burette

and remove the O-ring from the glass cylinder

using tweezers.

– Unscrew the holder of the glass cylinder

and take out the cylinder.

Caution: Do not misplace O-ring!

5, 10, or 20 mL burette

– Unscrew the locking screw of the burette

and take out the glass cylinder.

Caution: Do not misplace the centering

ring of the burette housing!

– Press the cam of the stopcock inward and

lift the stopcock up and out.

Cam

• Depending on the contamination caused by the titrant, rinse cylinder and tubing with acids

or deionized H 2 O then with ethanol and finally dry the parts with oil-free compressed air or

vacuum.

• Rinse the stopcock with solvents or deionized H 2 O only! Then dry it with oil-free compressed

air.

• Never place O-rings in organic solvents!

• Never attempt to remove any crystals in the cylinder by scratching with a hard object! Pipe

cleaners or Q tips are more suitable.

• Never put the parts in a drying oven whose temperature is above 40 °C!

– Replace the piston if it leaks or is badly scored at the edge. Pay special attention to crystal

formation between the lip seals of the piston if you work with NaOH/KOH and KF solutions!




10.2.5 General information

You can remove air bubbles at the piston surface by taking the burette out of the guide and

lightly tapping its base. This causes air bubbles to rise to the top. Then rinse the burette.

You can remove air bubbles in the tubes by tapping the tubes with your fingers while titrant is

being siphoned off or dispensed. If this does not help, undo the suction tube so that titrant flows

back into the bottle, screw it on again and rinse the burette (air purging). In obstinate cases

undo both tubes, rinse with deionized H 2 O and ethanol and dry using oil-free compressed air

or vacuum.

Titrants such as KMnO 4 or KOH in MeOH can easily crystallize in the tip of the burette and block

it. If you have no immediate use for a titrant, it is best to empty and clean the dispensing tube:

Unscrew connection to let the titrant flow out. Check the threaded connection and wipe off any

drops.

KF titrants are subject to outgassing, above all at elevated room temperatures (SO 2 ), which

leads to the formation of air bubbles in the tubes and in the burette (stopcock). You should thus

rinse these burettes before titrations!



Titration stand

10.3 Equipping the titration stand

3

9a

– Screw on titration arm (1) with nurled

screw (2).

– Insert stirring rod (3) and attach propeller

stirrer (4) from below to rod.

2

13

1

8

10

5

6

4

7

9

12

11

– Press spacing ring (5) onto titration

head, place clamping ring (6) in

threaded ring (7) and screw into

place.

– To install a titration vessel, turn the

threaded ring half a turn to the left,

attach the vessel and tighten threaded

ring.

– Insert burette tip (8) and electrode

(9) diagonally opposed – this ensures

better control in the titration –

and close the remaining openings

with stoppers (11 & 12).

(9a) is the plug-in electrode cable.

(10): This opening is intended for the

rinsing bottle connection.

(13) is the electrode holder.

– Always test the titration vessel for firm seating in the titration head! If it falls

off, you could injure yourself if working with toxic titrants and solvents or

strong acids or bases.


Rear view


10.4 Rear view of the titrator

Slot:

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

Input:

Reference electrode

Sensor inputs:

Sensor 1

Sensor 2

Temperature sensor

input: Temp 1

Stirrer outputs:

Stirrer 1

Stirrer 2

Analog outputs

TTLIO socket

TTLIO socket (used by titrator)

RS232 interface for sample changer

RS232 interface for balance

Centronics interface for printer

RS232 interface for system

pH KF RS Centronics option

Connector for

power cable

On/off

switch

The diagram shows a possible occupancy of all slots. The basic version of the titrator has the

following installed

• a pH option at slot No. 1

• an Centronics option at slot No. 4.

pH and KF options

You can install a sensor option in any slot. Each option has a number which is also affixed to

the data sheet enclosed with each sensor option (see Section 10.5.1).

DL53/55/58: You can use the inputs and outputs of maximum four sensor options, e.g. two pH

options at slot No. 1 and 2, two KF options at slot No. 3 and 4.

DL50: You can use the inputs and outputs of maximum one sensor option.

Centronics option

You can use the Centronics option only if it is installed in slot No. 4. The TTL inputs and outputs

of the socket can be used only for the commands preallocated by the titration software (see

Section 10.7).



Installing options

RS options

You can install an RS option either in slot No. 3 or slot No. 4. Although the options are identical,

the functions of the connections are not!

Slot No. 3: You can freely control the TTL inputs and outputs of the socket.

To the upper RS interface you can attach only a sample changer,

to the lower only a computer or a terminal.

Slot No. 4: You can use the TTL inputs and outputs of the socket only for the commands

stipulated by the titration software (see Section 10.7).

To the upper RS interface you can attach only a balance,

to the lower only a printer.

10.5 Installing the sensor, Centronics or RS option

– Switch the titrator off and disconnect the power cable before you unscrew

the cover plate of the slot! An electric shock could be fatal.

– Unscrew the cover plate of the slot.

– Insert the option in the two guide rails, push in option and

fasten with the two screws.

Notes

1. When you have installed a pH option that has not stored

the calibration data you should

• enter the calibration data for the characteristic line of the

measuring inputs (see Section 10.5.1).

• calibrate the electrodes/temperature sensors at the new

inputs (see Sections 2.2 and 6.1.3).

Soldering scheme

2. To attach temperature sensors of other companies, you

can use a Lemo cable plug (4-pin) and solder on the

appropriate cable (see Section 11.2: Accessories).

2

3

1

4

Shield

Pt100/Pt1000 sensor


Memory card


10.5.1 Calibration data for the characteristic curve of the measuring inputs

When the titrator is delivered, the measuring inputs are calibrated for a sensor and temperature

sensor (Pt100 and Pt1000) of the pH option. The data sheet filed in Section 14 documents the

data for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs of this pH option.

If the data are not stored on the actual option, you must reenter them (see Section 6.7.2)

• if system data are lost (see Section 9.1)

• if you install this option in a different slot.

If you order an additional pH option, you receive a data sheet with the number of the option

and the calibration data for its measuring inputs. You must enter these data for correct potential

and temperature measurements if they are not stored on the actual option (see Section 6.7.2).

The data for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs are always stored on KF options!

Note: As the characteristic line of the measuring inputs can exhibit long-term drift, we advise

you to have the inputs recalibrated every 2 years by METTLER TOLEDO Service.

10.6 Inserting the memory card

Note: Ensure that you are not electrostatically charged when you perform this operation! We

recommend you touch the metallic part of the titrator housing before you insert the

memory card to ensure the charge is not transferred to the titrator interior.

1 2

– Swing open the cover (1) of the slot for the

memory card.

– Push in the memory card until knob (2) springs

out.

– To remove the card, press the knob back in.



TTLIO

10.7 Using TTL inputs and outputs

The TTLIO socket of the Centronics option has two inputs and four outputs (In 1/In 2 and

Out 1...Out 4). These are assigned by the titrator to commands which are triggered during an

analysis. You can wire these inputs and outputs mechanically or electronically to trigger the

defined commands by auxiliary units or systems (see following examples).

The RS option has the same TTLIO socket as the Centronics option. When it is installed in slot

3, the inputs and outputs are always available and freely configurable (see Sections 6.7.5 and

6.7.6). At slot 4, they are assigned by the titrator to commands which you trigger during an

analysis:

Socket

2

1

3

8 4

5

7 6

Assignment (see Section 12.10.2: Technical data)

GND (Pin 1)...... signal ground

In 1 (Pin 2)........

In 2 (Pin 3)........

triggers the start of the analysis or confirms the mask

"Current sample" (titration stand 1, 2 or external)

triggers the abort of the analysis (Reset)

Out 1 (Pin 4) .....

Out 2 (Pin 5) .....

Out 3 (Pin 6) .....

VCC (Pin 7) ......

Out 4 (Pin 8) .....

gives a pulse after the sample function

the output signal assumes a "low" status during the

titration; this does not change until the sample is analyzed

(on display of the result list)

the output signal assumes a "low" status in the case of an

error message; this does not change until the message

has been confirmed with OK

supply voltage

on request for the next sample of a series, this triggers a

pulse (only with titration stand 1, 2 or external)

Wiring mechanically

If you wire, e.g. pin 1 (ground) with pin 2 (input 1) by

attaching a manual event sensor, you can initiate the

start of the analysis with this switch. The mask

"Defined are" must be blocked from the analysis

sequence for this as it can not be confirmed (see

Section 6.7.3).

In

GND

Event sensor


TTLIO


Wiring electronically

Input In 1 or In 2 Output Out 1, Out 2, Out 3 or Out 4

Titrator

external

Titrator

external

Out

In

GND

GND

GND

Output Out 1, Out 2, Out 3 or Out 4

Relay supply internal Relay supply external

(relay operate voltage: max. 3.5 V);

Icc: max. 60 mA

Titrator

external

Titrator

external

VCC

Relay

Relay

Out

Out

+

–

GND

Note: TTL are signals which do not transfer power. To operate, e.g. a pump it is necessary

to connect an amplifier in the circuit.



External keyboard

10.8 Attaching a keyboard

A DIN socket is located on the left side of the titrator and can be used for the attachment of an

external keyboard for alphanumeric entries.

– Attach the keyboard using the appropriate DIN cable (see Section 12.10: Technical data).

The following table shows the keys and key combinations which correspond to the command,

menu, auxiliary function and entry keys of the titrator:

Titrator

External keyboard

key key <Alt> + key <Ctrl>+ key

F1

F1

F2

F2

F3

F3

F4

F4

F5

F5

Setup

F12

Method

F10

Sample

F11

Run

F9

Sensor

e

Stirrer

s

Changer

c

Burette

b

Results

r

Report

p

Misc...

m

Data Transfer

d

Reset

Break (Pause)

Arrow key ∆ / Shift + ∆

↑ / Page up

Arrow key ∇ / Shift + ∇

↓ / Page down

Shift

Shift

1...9, . 1...9, . (b) 1...9 (a) 1...9

Del

Del

CE (Shift + Del)

Shift + Del

The characters /, -, +, =, etc., which are written with the Shift key, depend on the assignment

of the keyboard. Additional characters not on the titrator keypad are:

x → <Alt Gr> + x µ → <Alt Gr> + u ∆ → <Alt Gr> + d


Bar-code reader/terminal


10.8.1 Attaching a bar-code reader

You can attach a bar-code reader to the external keyboard. To ensure this is recognized by

the titrator, you must program a "header" and "terminator" with the external keyboard (see

Operating Instructions of the keyboard in question). The titrator requires the key sequence

"Shift"/"Enter" for both parameters.

You can then read in, e.g. the bar code for the sample identification without having to define

the bar-code reader in the Setup menu.

You must define the bar-code reader if you wish to use it for direct data transfer to a computer


10.9 Configuration of the terminal (DEC VT340)

You have attached the terminal to the titrator and defined it (see Section 2.7.3). To configure

it, proceed as follows:

– Switch off the titrator.

– Switch on the terminal and wait until the message VT340 OK appears.

– Press the Set-Up key: The SET-UP DIRECTORY appears.

a. If you have already configured the terminal for other connections, first select Recall

Factory Default Settings to reactivate the default settings.

b. If you have not yet used the terminal, you can change some of the default parameters

directly.

– Select General Set-UP and change the following parameters:

Terminal mode

VT300-8bit

– Select Display Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Scrolling

jump

Status Display

host writable

– Select Communications Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Transmit Speed 9600 *

Receive XOFF Point 512

Character Format 8 bits, even parity *

* These parameters must match the defined terminal settings!

(See Section 2.7.3)

– Select Keyboard Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Keypad mode

numeric, so that the numeric keys of the numeric key field (on

extreme right of keyboard) are active.


∆


Terminal

– Select Save Current Settings to save the modified parameters.

– Press the Set-Up key to quit the SET-UP DIRECTORY.

– Switch on the titrator: The terminal screen is now built up by the titrator.

If you have switched off both instruments,

– first switch on the terminal, then the titrator.

You can use the keyboard of the terminal to operate the titrator. The keys have the following

assignments:

Titrator

Terminal

key key numeric key field

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

Setup

Method

Sample

Run

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F14

F12

F13

F11

Sensor 8

Stirrer 5

Changer 4

Burette 7

Results 3

Report 2

Misc... 1

Data Transfer 6

Reset

Arrow key ∆ / Shift + ∆

Arrow key ∇ / Shift + ∇ ∇ ∇

F20

↑ / Prev. screen

↓ / Next screen

Shift

Shift

1...9, . 1...9, .

Del

Remove

Shift +

←

Shift +

→

∆


Accessories

Contents

Page

11. Accessories .................................................................................................. 11-3

11.1 Standard equipment .................................................................................... 11-4

Small accessories .......................................................................................... 11-6

11.2 Optional accessories ................................................................................... 11-7

Burette drive ................................................................................................... 11-7

Interchangeable burettes ............................................................................... 11-7

Additional parts for the burette ....................................................................... 11-9

Titration stands ............................................................................................... 11-9

Additional parts for the titration stand........................................................... 11-11

Sensors ........................................................................................................ 11-13

Temperature sensors ................................................................................... 11-15

Accessories for Karl-Fischer titrations.......................................................... 11-15

Peripherals ................................................................................................... 11-16

Titration software .......................................................................................... 11-16

Miscellaneous .............................................................................................. 11-17

Options ......................................................................................................... 11-19

Documentation ............................................................................................. 11-19

11.3 METTLER TOLEDO literature and application brochures ...................... 11-20


Accessories

11. Accessories

All instrument components of and working aids for the titrator that form part of

• the standard equipment and

• the optional accessories

are listed below.

Each part that is listed with an order number can be ordered from METTLER TOLEDO.


Accessories

11.1 Standard equipment


(DL50 Graphix/

DL50 Rondolino only)

Propeller stirrer

Rondolino

(DL50 Rondolino only)

Burette drive

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Titration stand

(DL50 Graphix only)

Electrode holder

(DL53/DL55/DL58 only)


Accessories

DL53

DL50 DL50 DL55

Graphix Rondolino DL58

Titration stand x

Rondolino

x

Electrode holder

x

Burette drive DV90 x x x


(10 mL) DV1010* x* x*

Propeller stirrer

incl. 2 stirring rods x x x

pH option x x x

Centronics option x x x

RS option x x x

Titration Software LabX light x x x

Power cable x x x

Electrode cable x x x

Printer cable x x x

RS connection cable x x x

Reference Handbook x x x

Quick Guide x x x

Memo card x x x

Application broschure No. 12 x x x

Small accessories

(see next page)

* see optional accessories


Accessories

Small accessories

DL53

DL50 DL50 DL55

(Order No.) Graphix Rondolino DL58

2 knurled screws (25650) x x x

Threaded ring (25652)

Clamping ring (25653)

Spacing ring (23842)

Titration vessel (Set) x x

x

x

x

2 electrode holder (25654) x x x

3 stoppers ST 14.5 (23451) x x x

2 stoppers ST 7.5 (23452) x x x

Stopper holder (25662) x x x

Phillips screwdriver No. 2 (73072) x x x

Operating Instructions LabX light x x x


Accessories

11.2 Optional accessories

The numbers enclosed in parentheses refer to the purchase order, e.g. of an interchangeable

burette. In case of additional orders some parts are available only in multipack form or as a

minimum quantity.

Burette drive

Order No.

Burette drive

DV90

Interchangeable burettes

Interchangeable burette, complete 1 mL DV1001

5 mL DV1005

10 mL DV1010

20 mL DV1020

comprising:

1 L brown glass bottle (1) 71296

and

Burette holder (1) 23645

and

Piston (1) DV1001 51107535

DV1005 51107115

DV1010 51107116

DV1020 51107117


HCl

HCl

c= mol/L c= mol/L

Date:

Date:

1/2 H2SO4

c= mol/L

AgNO3

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

NaOH

c= mol/L

Date:

1/2 H2SO4

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

NaOH

AgNO3

c= mol/L c= mol/L

Date:

Date:

KF

KF

c= mg H2O/mL c= mg H2O/mL

Date:

Date:

c= mol/L c= mol/L

Date:

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

c= mol/L

Date:

Accessories

Order No.

and

Stopcock (1) with valve disk 1) made of:

PTFE (light-gray) (standard equipment of interchangeable burette) 51107537

ceramic (dark-brown) (optional accessories) 51107525

1) Both valve disks are chemically resistant. For 24-hour use with titrants that

have a tendency to cristallize out, we recommend the ceramic disk.

and

Light protection tube (1) 23644

and

Dispensing tube (1) with siphon tip 0.70 m 25687

and

Suction tube (1) 0.83 m 25688

and

Gasket (1) min. order quantity: 5 23981

for 1 L brown glass bottle

and

Tip holder (1) for burette tip 23960

and

Stopper ST 14.5 (1) min. order quantity: 5 23646

and

Set of labels (1) 51107506


Accessories

Order No.

Additional parts for the burette

Dispensing tube with siphon tip 1.00 m 25961

Drying tube with cover 23961

Drying tube holder 23915

Molecular sieves 250 g 71478

Siphon tip set set of 5 23240

Adapter for bottles of: Merck, DE 23774

Fisher, US 23787

Bottle rack for two 1-liter 51107065

bottles with burettes

Titration stands

Titration stand, complete 51108760

Dual titration stand, complete

DV92


Accessories

Order No.

Titration stands 51108760 DV92

comprising:

Angle bracket (1) x 25655

Propeller stirrer x 51109150

incl. 2 stirring rods

Titration arm (1) x x 25651

Spacing ring (1) x x 23842

Clamping ring (1) x x 25653

Threaded ring (1) x x 25652

Knurled screw (2) x 25650

Electrode holder (2) x 25654

min. order quantity: 5

Stopper ST 14.5 (3) x 23451


Stopper ST 7.5 (2) x 23452


Titration vessel 100 mL x x 101974

polypropylene (2)

set of 1400


Accessories

Order No.

Additional parts for the titration stand

Titration vessel 100 mL set of 1400 25777

polypropylene, red colored

Titration vessel 80 mL, glass set of 20 101446

Titration vessel 250 mL, glass set of 10 23515

Titration vessel 5-20 mL, glass 23516

Titration vessel for two-phase titration 51107655

incl. stop cock, threaded ring and gasket

Thermostatable titration vessel 80 mL, glass 23517

Plastic cover for titration vessels set of 16 101448

Heat exchanger for thermostating 23834

incl. adapter with taper joint

Gas inlet 23721

Rinsing unit, complete 23821

with titration head insert and stoppers

for unused openings in titration head

1 set of stoppers for rinsing unit 101230

Electrode holder 51108730


Accessories

Order No.

Propeller stirrer 51109150

incl. 2 stirring rods

Propeller stirring rod 101229

Micropropeller stirring rod 655073

(for titration vessel 23516)

Adapter cable 0.50 m 51107216

(mini DIN male / RCA female)

Peristaltic pump SP250 51108016

with Novoprene tubes, adapters, hose clamps

Novoprene tubes (1x 1 m + 10x 120 mm) 51190969

Fluorosilicone elastomer tubes (5x 120 mm) 51108149

for SP250

Diaphragm pump 51108012

incl. suction tube

Heating system DH100

110 V 51108779

230 V 51108780

Dispensing unit DU200

EU version 51370200

US version 51370210


Accessories

Order No.

Sensors

Combined pH electrode for

titrations in aqueous solutions

DG111-SC

Combined pH electrode for small volumes

in small titration vessels in aqueous solutions

DG101-SC

Combined glass electrode with movable sleeve

frit for titrations in nonaqueous solutions

DG113-SC

Combined glass electrode with movable sleeve

frit for titrations in aqueous solutions

DG114-SC

Combined glass electrode with sleeve

frit for titrations in aqueous solutions

DG115-SC

Combined platinum ring electrode for

redox titrations

DM140-SC

Combined silver ring electrode for

argentometric titrations

DM141-SC


Accessories

Order No.

Ion selective measuring electrodes

• Fluoride ISE DX219 51089931

• Chloride ISE DX235 51089933

• Nitrate ISE DX262 51089934

• Sodium ISE DX223 51089930

• Potassium ISE DX239 51089932

• Lithium ISE DX207 51107673

• Ammonia GSE DX217 51107677

• Ammonium ISE DX218 51107679

• Magnesium ISE DX224 51107684

• Cyanide ISE DX226 51107681

• Sulfide ISE DX232 51107675

• Calcium ISE DX240 51107683

• Bromide ISE DX280 51107671

• Fluoroborate ISE DX287 51107676

• Silver ISE DX308 51107682

• Cadmium ISE DX312 51107672

• Iodide ISE DX327 51107680

• Barium ISE DX337 51107674

• Surfactant sensitive electrode DS500 51107670

Reference electrode for

• ion selective electrodes DX200 51089935

• surfactant sensitive electrodes Inlab 301 52000128

Triaxial cable (Electrode cable with LEMO connector)

Cable SC-LEMO-60 0.60 m 89601

Cable SC-LEMO-100 1.00 m 89602

Cable SC-LEMO-160 1.60 m 51108034

Phototrode (incl. power supply unit)

for color-indicated titrations

Transmission measurement

at 555, 660, 520, 620, 590 nm

DP5

Adapter cable 1) (DIN-LEMO) for 89600

attachment of electrodes or phototrode

with DIN connector to the titrator

1) If sensors with DIN connectors are attached via the adapter cable to the titrator,

the advantages offered by the triaxial cable – high level of protection against

electrostatic interference – are in part lost. In the case of sensors with a very high

resistance, e.g. DG113 in nonaqueous solutions, we advise against use of the

adapter cable.


Accessories

Order No.

Temperature sensors

Pt1000 sensor

DT1000

Lemo cable connector (4 pin) 88321

for temperature sensors (non-METTLER)

Accessories for Karl-Fischer titrations

KF option 51107269

Double-pin platinum electrode

DM143-SC

Electrode cable (SC/Banana) 1.00 m 51108061

External titration stand

DV705

Thermostatable beaker 51107497

(for KF titration vessel)

Stand rod 51107495


GA42 Printer

17.375 g

19.319 g

8. 03 g

7. 73 g

6. 54 g

10.506 g

8.097 g

5.876 g

3.205 g

1.098 g

OUT 1 OUT 2

24 VDC 1.2 A

1 0-240 V

50/60 Hz

unfused

max. 9 A

OUT 3

OUT 4

IN 1

IN 2

ON

TBox DR42

ME TLER TOLEDO

Accessories

Order No.

Peripherals

METTLER TOLEDO balances with data output

AG, AM, PM, AT

AX, AB, PB, PR, XP

Printer DIN A4 / US Letter

on request

Printer

RS-P42

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

TBox (control of external devices via TTLIO)

DR42

Sample changer

Rondolino

Sample changer Rondo 60

Connection cable for Rondolino or TBox 51107424

Connection cable for Rondo 60 51108304

Titration software

- LabX pro titration (for Windows 2000/XP)

- Instrument licenses for Titrators


Accessories

Order No.

Miscellaneous

Keypad cover set of 3 51107667

Adapter cable 0.23 m 25914

(banana sockets-DIN connector)

Memory Card

for DL53 and DL55

USER DATA

ME-51107230

Memory card (Flash type, 2 MB) 51107230

Dongle for software updates, DL53 ⇒ DL55 51107210

upgrading the titrator DL53 ⇒ DL55+ 51107211

and special methods DL53 ⇒ DL53+ 51107212

DL55 ⇒ DL55+ 51107213

DL53 ⇒ DL58 51107275

DL55 ⇒ DL58 51107276

Connection cable: Centronics option

Connection cable for AM, PM, AT balances 229029

(D sub 9-pin female, 15-pin male)

Connection cable for AX balances 11101051

Connection cable for balances with Option 011 59759


Connection cable for AG, AB, PB, PR balances 229065

(LC-RS9 cable)

Connection cable for SARTORIUS balances 51190363



Accessories

Order No.

Connection cable: RS option

Connection cable for AM, PM, AT balances 51107196

Connection cable for balances with Option 51107195

03 and 011 (RS8 male, D sub 25-pin male)

Connection cable for AG, AB, PB, PR balances

(LC-RS8 cable) 229185

Connection cable for SARTORIUS balances 200495

(RS8 male, D sub 25-pin male)

Connection cable (RS232C) for printer 200495

(RS8 male, D sub 25-pin female)

Connection cable (RS232C) for GA42 printer 201508

(DTE, 9-pin female)

Connection cable (RS232C) for computer

(DTE, 9-pin female) 201508

Connection cable (RS232C) for computer/terminal

(DTE, 25-pin female) 201507


Accessories

Order No.

Options

RS option: 2 RS232C interfaces (DCE) 51107172

plus 1 TTLIO socket

Centronics option: 1 Centronics and 51107289

1 RS232C interface plus 1 TTLIO socket

KF option: 2 inputs for polarized electrode, 1 stirrer 51107269

output and 1 analog output

pH option: One input each for reference electrode, 51107152

sensor, temperature sensor plus stirrer and

analog output

Documentation

Reference Handbook • German 51709613

• English 51709614

• French 51709615

Quick Guide • German 51709616

• English 51709617

• French 51709618

• Spanish 51709619

• Italian 51709620

Memo card • German 51709621

• English 51709622

• French 51709623

• Spanish 51709624

• Italian 51709625

Application Brochure (No. 12) • German 51724764

• English 51724765

Computer Interface • German 51709495

Description • English 51709496


Accessories

11.3 METTLER TOLEDO literature and application brochures

Basics of Titration 51725008

Basiswissen in der Titration 51725007

Fundamentals of Titration 704153

Grundlagen der Titration 704152

Bases du Titrage 704154

Guide to pH Measurement 51300047

Anleitung zur pH-Bestimmung 51300058

Guide to Ion Selective Measurement 51300075

Anleitung zur ionenselektiven Messung 51300201

Guide to Conductivity and Dissolved Oxygen 51724716

Anleitung zur Leitfähigkeits- und Sauerstoffmessung 51724715

Guide de mésure da la conductivité et de l'oxygène dissous 51724717

DL5x Application Brochure 12 (30 Selected Applications for DL5x Titrators) 51724765

DL5x Applikationsbroschüre 12 (30 ausgewählte Applikationen für DL5x Titratoren) 51724764

DL5x Application Brochure 22 (Surfactant Titration) 51725015

DL5x Applikationsbroschüre 22 (Titration von Tensiden) 51725014

DL5x / DL7x Application Brochure 29 (Rondo 60 Sample Changer) 51710082

Memory Card Application package for METTLER TOLEDO Titrators DL53/DL55/DL58 51107233

Memory Card and Application Brochure 18 (51724917): Standardization of Titrants

Memory Card Applikationssammlung für METTLER TOLEDO Titratoren DL53/DL55/DL58: 51107234

Speicherkarte und Applikationsbroschüre 18 (51724916): Titerbestimmungen


Memory Card and Application Brochure 19 (51725012): Determinations in Beverages

Memory Card Applikationssammlung für METTLER TOLEDO Titratoren DL53/DL55/DL58: 51107236

Speicherkarte und Applikationsbroschüre 19 (51725013): Getränkebestimmungen


Memory Card and Application Brochure 17 (51724915): Pulp and Paper Industry


Memory Card and Application Brochure 20 (51725020): Petroleum Industry


Accessories

We have developed applications for the METTLER TOLEDO DL770, DL67, DL70ES and DL77 Titrators, which

have a method concept similar to that of the DL50, DL53, DL55 and DL 58 series. You will find these useful when

defining the parameters of your method functions.

DL70 Application Brochure 1 (18 Customer Methods) 724492

DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 1 (18 Kundenapplikationen) 724491

DL70 Application Brochure 2 (Various Methods) 724557

DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 2 (Verschiedene Beispiele) 724556

DL70 Application Brochure 3 (TAN and TBN) 724559

DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 3 (TAN und TBN) 724558

DL70 Application Brochure 4 (Electroplating) 724561

DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 4 (Galvanik) 724560

DL7x Application Brochure 5 (Determinations in Water) 51724634

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 5 (Bestimmungen in Wasser) 51724633

DL7x Application Brochure 6 (Direct Measurement with Ion Selective Electrodes) 51724646

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 6 (Direktmessung mit ionenselektiven Elektroden) 51724645

DL7x Application Brochure 7 (Incremental Techniques with Ion Selective Electrodes) 51724648

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 7 (Additionsverfahren mit ionenselektiven Elektroden) 51724647

DL7x Application Brochure 8 (Standardization of Titrants I) 51724650

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 8 (Titerbestimmungen I) 51724649

DL7x Application Brochure 9 (Standardization of Titrants II) 51724652

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 9 (Titerbestimmungen II) 51724651

DL7x Application Brochure 13 (Nitrogen Determination by Kjeldahl Digestion) 51724769

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 13 (Stickstoffbestimmung nach Kjeldahl Aufschluss) 51724768

DL7x Application Brochure 14 (Good Labatory Practice in the Titration Lab) 51724908

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 14 (Gute Laborpraxis im Titrationslabor) 51724907

DL7x Application Brochure 15 (Guidelines for Result Check, 51724910

Method Validation and Instrument Certification)

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 15 (Leitfaden zur Resultatkontrolle, 51724909

Methodenvalidierung und Gerätezertifizierung)

DL7x Application Brochure 16 (Validation of Titration Methods) 51724912

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 16 (Validierung von Titrationsmethoden) 51724911


Technical Data

Contents

Page

12. Technical data ........................................................................................... 12-3

12.1 Measurement system................................................................................ 12-3

12.2 Outputs ...................................................................................................... 12-4

12.3 Burette drive module ................................................................................ 12-5

12.4 Interchangeable burettes ......................................................................... 12-5

12.5 Propeller stirrer ......................................................................................... 12-5

12.6 Display ....................................................................................................... 12-5

12.7 Memories ................................................................................................... 12-5

12.8 Interface for memory card ........................................................................ 12-6

12.9 Attachment possibilities for peripheral units ......................................... 12-6

12.10 Sockets and connectors........................................................................... 12-7

12.10.1 DIN socket................................................................................................... 12-7

12.10.2 TTLIO socket............................................................................................... 12-7

12.10.3 RS232C connector (Centronics option) ...................................................... 12-7

12.10.4 Centronics socket (Centronics option) ........................................................ 12-8

12.10.5 RS232C socket ........................................................................................... 12-9

12.11 Additional data .......................................................................................... 12-9


Technical Data

12. Technical data

12.1 Measurement system

End point indication

• potentiometric

• photometric

• change of the refractive index and/or the turbidity

• voltametric/amperometric

• conductometric

Third-party instrument with analog output

Temperature compensation

Temperature input via keypad or automaticalfor

pH/pM/pX measurement ly with the aid of a temperature sensor

Sensor input: pH option

(differential amplifier)

Triaxial socket (LEMO)

• Input resistance

>10 12 Ω (protected up to 1000 V capacitatively)

• Offset current

<1 pA (20 °C)

• Measurement range

- pH value ±27.6 pH

- voltage ±2050.0 mV

• Resolution

0.1 mV, 0.002 pH (pM, pX)

• Maximum permissible error 0.1%

• Zero point drift <30 µV/ °C

• Additional reference input

Banana socket, diameter: 4 mm

Temperature sensor input

4-pin socket (LEMO)

• Measurement range -30 °C to 130 °C

• Resolution 0.1 °C

• Maximum permissible error 0.2 °C

• Measurement principle

4-line measurement technique: Pt100 or

Pt1000

• Zero point drift <0.01 °C/ °C


Technical Data

Sensor input: KF option

Sensor input

2 Banana sockets, diameter: 4 mm

Voltage source

• Range

-1270 to +1270 mV

• Resolution

10 mV in the range -1270 to +1270 mV

1 mV in the range -127 to +127 mV

• Measurement range -150 to +150 µA

• Resolution

0.01µA (16-bit AD converter)


Current source

• Range -127 to +127 µA

• Resolution 1 µA in the range -127 to +127 µA

0.1 µA in the range -12.7 to +12.7 µA

• Measurement range

-1500 to +1500 mV

• Resolution

0.1mV (16-bit AD converter))


12.2 Outputs

Stirrer output

5-pin socket (mini DIN)

• Voltage range

0 – 18 V in no-load operation

• Speed stabilized Typically: <5%

the output is protected electronically against

overload, Imax: 300 mA

Analog output

2 banana sockets, diameter: 2 mm

• Gain 1

• Offset: max. permissible error

35 mV

• Range

±2000 mV

• Range: max. permissible error 1%

• Output resistance

220 Ω


Technical Data

12.3 Burette drive module

With direct current motor

Equipment DL50/DL53: max. 1, DL55/DL58: max. 2

Resolution

1/5000 of the burette volume

Maximum permissible error

0.3% relative to the respective burette volume

of 5, 10 and 20 mL

Filling time

20 s

Discharge time

Minimum 20 s

12.4 Interchangeable burettes

Volume

Materials which come into contact with

the titrant

1, 5, 10 and 20 mL

Fluoroplastic, borosilicate glass, ceramics

12.5 Propeller stirrer

Maximum speed

3800 rpm

Power consumption P max. : 6 W

P typical : 1.2 W at 12 V

12.6 Display

LCD with graphics capability

Languages

6 lines, 39 characters per line

240 x 64 pixels, backlighting through cold

cathode fluorescent lamp

English, German, French, Spanish and Italian

12.7 Memories

Database

User data memory (EEPROM)

METTLER methods, standard methods

User methods, resource and sample data, space

for approx. 50 standard methods


Technical Data

12.8 Interface for memory card

Slot for 68-pin memory card of type 1

Standards supported:

Memory cards which can be used:

1. Flash memory card series 2

Intel with the designation:

Mitsubishi with the designation:

2. SRAM Melcard

Mitsubishi with the designation:

• PCMCIA, version 2.0

• JEIDA, version 4.1

• iMC002FLSA - 20 (2 MB storage capacity)

• iMC004FLSA - 20 (4 MB storage capacity)

• MF82M1-G7DAT 01 (2 MB storage capacity)

• MF84M1-G7DAT 01 (4 MB storage capacity)

• MF31M1-LCDAT 01 (1 MB storage capacity)

12.9 Attachment possibilities for peripheral units

Balance

Printer

Sample Changer

Terminal or computer

(LIMS: in-house laboratory

information management system)

Auxiliary units (third-party units)

External keyboard (third-party unit,

e.g. commercial PC keyboard)

Attachment via RS232C interface of the Centronics

or an RS option at slot No. 4 for all

METTLER TOLEDO and SARTORIUS balances

Attachment via Centronics interface of the Centronics

option or via RS232C interface of an RS

option at slot No. 4 for various commercial

graphics printers (on use of the RS option with

XON/XOFF protocol)

Attachment via RS232C interface of the RS

option at slot No. 3 (available as an option)

Attachment via RS232C interface of the RS

option at slot No. 3 (available as an option)

Attachment via TTLIO socket of the RS option

at slot No. 3 (available as an option)

Attachment via the DIN socket, 5-pin


Technical Data

12.10 Sockets and connectors

12.10.1 DIN socket

5-pin, DIN 180°, following DIN 41524

Pin assignment

5

2

4

CLOCK

DATA

1

2

3

1

–

GND

VCC

Titrator

+

4

5

VCC: 5 V

12.10.2 TTLIO socket

8-pin connector, series 712 waterproof (TTL: Transistor-Transistor-Logic)

The socket has 2 TTL inputs and 4 TTL outputs.

Pin assignment

1

8

7

2

6

3

4

5

GND

In 1

In 2

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

VCC

Out 4

Titrator

+5 V

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

VCC: +5 V, max. 60 mA

In: TTL; short circuit proof

Pulse ≥150 ms (the input signal

must be at least 150 ms for

the titrator)

Out: Open collector

• Vce max. = 24 V

• Ic max. = 20 mA

12.10.3 RS232C connector (Centronics option)

9-pin, D-Sub

5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

Shielding

RxD (In)

TxD (Out)

DSR

RSGND

+12 V

Titrator

BR

330 Ω

Pin assignment

1

2

3

4

5

Data to titrator

Data from titrator

Handshake from titrator,

fixed to operational readiness

Electrically isolated signal

ground


Technical Data

12.10.4 Centronics socket (Centronics option)

19-pin connector, series 723 waterproof

Pin assignment

/STROBE

A: Data ready

D0

B:

D1

C:

D2

D:

L

A

K

B

U

M

I

T

N

C

H

S

R

P

O

D

G

E

F

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

/ACK

BUSY

PE

SLCT

/AUTO FDXT

E:

F:

G:

H:

I:

Data

K: Data adopted

L: Printer occupied

M: End of paper

N: Printer active

O: Automatic line feed

/ERROR

P: Printer error

/INIT

R: Initializing printer

/SLCTIN

S: Printer selected

GND

GND

T:

U:

Signal ground

Titrator


Technical Data

12.10.5 RS232C socket

8-pin connector DIN 45326, series 723 waterproof

6

8

7

BR

Shielding

1

TxD (Out)

4

2 RxD (In)

5 RSGND

3 330 Ω

DSR +12 V

Titrator

Pin assignment

1

2

3

6

8

Data to titrator

Data from titrator

Electrically isolated signal

ground

Handshake from titrator

fixed to operational readiness

12.11 Additional data

Housing

Titration stand

Keypad

Dimensions

Weight

Power supply

Fuse

Frequency

Maximum power consumption

Polyester

Polypropylene

Polyester, splashwater-proof

Width: 260 mm, depth: 395 mm, height: 270 mm

Approx. 8 kg with one burette drive

100 – 240 VAC ±10% (automatic range adjustment)

2 x T1,6L250V (not exchangeable)

50/60 Hz

400 mA

Ambient conditions • Ambient temperature: +5 °C to +40 °C

• Maximum relative atmospheric humidity of 80% for

temperatures of up to 31 °C, decreasing linearly to

50% relative atmospheric humidity at 40 °C.

• Use indoors

• Height up to 2000 m

• Overvoltage category II

• Pollution degree 2


Index

Index

Numbers incorporating dashes refer to sections in the Reference Handbook (example: 3-38),

Numbers without dashes refer to the Quick Guide (example: 9).

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10

∆E

EP titration function 3-39

EQP titration function 3-25

EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

measure function 3-17

∆E(set)



∆t





Accessories

optional accessories 11-7

standard equipment 11-4

Activate

control input 6-32

control output 6-33

Adjust measuring inputs 6-28

Amperometric indication

EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-58


Analysis

aborting (Reset) 5-12

fading out 5-11

is interrupted 5-11

menu sequence 5-4

"Run" menu 5-3

start 5-4

Analysis sequences (examples)

CaCl 2 determination 5-7

calibration of a pH electrode 27

comparison: titration stand 1/ST20A 5-16

determination of the HCl content 12

pH-stating 5-10

titer determination (NaOH) 32

with the sample changer 5-17

Arrow keys 7

Asterisk (*) 3-4, 3-11

Asymmetric (evaluation procedure)

equivalence point recognition 3-28, 3-50

evaluation parameter 3-34, 3-53

explanation 8-16

Audio signal 6-28

Auto stand

definition 2-17

sample series 5-6, 5-15

Auxiliary functions

explanation 9, 6-3

keys 6-3

overview 1-4, 1-5

Auxiliary value(s)

entering 2-15

entry through determination 2-15

function 3-73

memories 3-73

resource 2-15

storage procedure 2-16

Balance(s)

configuration (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22

configuration (SARTORIUS) 2-22

connection 10-10

defining 2-21

Bar-code reader

connection 10-16

defining 2-24

Bar-code string 6-43

Baud rate

balances 2-22

computer 2-23

printer 2-20

terminal 2-25

Bidirectional transmission mode 2-21, 4-12

Buffer solutions

DIN/NIST buffer 3-70

MERCK buffer 3-69

METTLER TOLEDO buffer 3-69

Burette

air bubbles 10-8

equipping 10-5

filling 13

inserting 10-6

installing 10-4

maintaining 10-4, 10-7

order No. 11-4

rinsing 6-11

rinsing tip 6-12


Index

Burette drive

inserting 10-3

selecting 2-5

Burette volume

selecting 2-5

smallest increment 3-24

Burette tip 6-12

C (constant) 3-66, 8-7

c ( nominal concentration) 8-3

c * t (actual concentration) 8-3

Calculation(s)

formulas 8-17

function 3-66

indices 8-9

performing (auxiliary function) 6-20

Calibration

function 3-69

pH electrodes 27

sensors 3-69

temperature sensors 6-6

Calibration data

measuring inputs 6-29

sensors 2-9, 2-10, 3-69


Centronics interface

GA42 printer 2-18

printer configuration 2-19

Centronics option

connection possibilities 10-9

installing 10-10

Changer 6-9

Character set (computer) 2-24

Clock (titrator) 6

Code (sync function) 7-18

Combined termination conditions 3-34, 3-53

Command keys 9

Communication protocol (computer) 2-24

Computer

bar-code reader 2-24

bar-code string 6-43

configuration 2-23

connection 10-10

data transfer 6-40

remote control 6-42

Concentration (titrant) 2-4, 8-3

Conditioning 3-15

Conductivity measurement 2-8

Conductometer 2-8

Constants

calculation function 3-66

calculations (auxiliary function) 6-20

examples 8-18

Continuous (titrant addition) 3-40, 3-60

Control band



pH/mV-stat function 3-63

Control input

activating (auxiliary function) 6-32

function 7-15

Control inputs

defining 7-4

resource 7-4

Control mode (activate control output)

input controlled 6-33

on/off 6-33

sequential 6-34

Control mode (control output function)

fixed time 7-16

input controlled 7-16

on/off 7-16

sequential 7-17

Control output

activating (auxiliary function) 6-33

function 7-16

Control outputs

defining 7-5

resource 7-5

Control range




Correction factor f 4-6, 5-6

Correlation coefficient 3-62, 3-65, 8-6

CSTAT (correlation coefficient) 3-62, 8-6

Current measurement (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

Current sample (mask)

notes 5-6

Cursor 10

Cx (calculation constant) 8-7

Database 12-5

Data bits

computer 2-24

printer 2-20

terminal 2-25

Data sheet

KF option 10-12

pH option 10-12

Data Transfer 6-36


Index

Date

entering 6-27

selecting format 6-26

Date specification

auxiliary values 2-15

methods 3-11

sensors 2-9


titrants 2-5

Defined are (mask)

exclusion 6-30

meaning 5-5

Delay 3-42, 3-61

Directory (memory card) 6-37

Dispense

auxiliary function (burette) 6-12

auxiliary function (ST20A) 6-10

continuously 6-13

continuously (Ipol/Upol) 6-15

function 3-19

DL58

commands 7-3

functions 7-3

resources 7-3

DLWin software 4-13, 6-41

Documentation

information 4

Drift (potential measurement) 3-17

Dynamic (titrant addition)



E (potential) 3-17, 8-7

EHNV (half neutralization value) 3-20, 8-4

Electrodes (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13

End point




range 3-40, 3-60

titration 3-37, 3-56

Entry keys 10

EP

absolute 3-41

relative 3-41

EP titration (function) 3-37

EP titration (Ipol/Upol) (function) 3-56

EPOT 8-4

EQP titration (function) 3-20

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) (function) 3-45

Equilibrium controlled measured value acquisition





Equivalence point(s)

explanation 3-20, 3-45, 8-14

formulas for restriction 8-19

maximum number/sample determination 8-20

range 3-32, 3-51

recognition 3-28, 3-50

Equivalence point titration 3-20, 3-45

Equivalent number


entering 3-13

Error messages

"EPROM test failed" 9-3

learn titration 5-11

"RAM test failed" 9-3

referring to Section 9.1 9-3

Esc command (<F1>) 9

ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

Evaluation




Evaluation procedure

EQP titration function 3-28, 3-34

EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53

explanation 8-14

Expert (user level) 6-31

Expiry date (titrant) 2-5, 5-4

External keyboard

connection 10-15

defining 2-26

key assignment 10-15

External stand 2-17

Extinction 2-8

f (correction factor) 4-6, 8-3

Fixed time (control output function ) 7-16

Fixed volume

note 5-5

selecting 3-12

Form feed (printer) 2-19

Formula(s)

auxiliary value function 3-73


calculations (auxiliary function) 6-20

constants 8-18

for restriction of the equivalence point 8-19

results 8-17

titer function 3-72

Frame lines (report) 2-19

Function(s)


Index

adding 7-8

deleting 7-8

DL58 7-3

explanation 20, 3-3

maximum number 7-9

modifying 3-10

overview 24

selecting 3-7

H (auxiliary value) 2-15, 8-3

Half neutralization value 3-20

In 3.1/3.2 (TTL inputs) 6-32

Incremental (titrant addition)


EQP (Ipol/Upol) titration function 3-48

two-phase titration function 7-14

Indexing forms

compilation 8-12

examples 8-9, 8-10

Indication



Indices 8-9

Inflection point 8-14

Initial potential ET1 3-22

Input controlled

activate control output (auxiliary function) 6-33

control output function 7-16

Input signal (control input function) 7-15

Installation and maintenance 10-3

Instruction


function 7-11

Interchangeable burette: see burette 10-4

Interpolation (evaluation) 8-14

Interval (conditioning) 3-15

Karl-Fischer titrations

accessories 11-15

Keyboard

external 2-26

titrator 7

Key combinations 10

KF option

inputs and outputs 10-10

installing 10-11

measuring inputs (calibration data) 6-29

polarized sensors 2-13

LabX titration software 4-13, 6-41

Language (changing) 11, 6-27

Learn titration

function 3-43

results 5-9

Lift position (sample changer) 6-9

Line feed (printer) 2-19

Lists (explanation) 8

M (molar mass) 3-68, 8-3

m (sample size) 8-3

Maintenance

burette 10-7

titrator 10-3

Malfunctions 9-6

Manual

temperature entry 3-13

titration 6-14, 6-16

Masks (explanation) 8

Max. time (control input function) 7-15

Maximum (evaluation procedure)



explanation 8-14

Maximum time (EP titration function (Ipol/Upol))

3-61

Maximum volume






Mean value x

auxiliary value function 3-73


titer function 3-72

Measure (function) 3-17

Measure mode




Measured points for equivalence point recog-nition

3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Measured values

displaying 5-7, 6-21

maximum number/titration function 8-20

storage specification 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Measuring inputs

adjusting 6-28

calibration data 6-29


Index

Memory card

directory 6-37

formatting 6-36, 6-40

inserting 10-11

interface 12-6

types 12-6

use 6-36

Memory copy(ies)

copying on memory card 6-39

loading to titrator 6-40

transferring to computer 6-41

Menus

explanation 8

keys 8

overview 1-2, 1-3

Method

concept 19

deleting 3-5

explanation 3-3

generating 24

modifying 3-7

modifying (current sample series) 5-12

modifying (ongoing method: DL55/DL58) 5-13

on computer 4-5

on memory card 4-5

printing 3-4


Methods

menu 3-3

printing 3-4

selecting 3-4

Method ID

defining 3-11

entering 4-4, 5-5

explanation 3-4

METTLER methods 3-6

modifying 3-9

standard methods 3-5

METTLER methods

90001: performance 14

90002: performance 27

explanation 19

modifying 25, 3-6

printing 3-6

Minimum (evaluation procedure)



explanation 8-14

Misc. ... 6-26

Mixing time (two-phase titration function ) 7-14

Modify: command (<F4>) 10

Molar mass M


entering 3-13

neq (number of equivalence points) 8-4

OK command (<F5>) 9

On/Off

activate control output (auxiliary function) 6-33


Operating concept 7

Options 10-9

Out 3.1...3.4 (TTL outputs) 6-33

Output (reports) 3-74, 6-24

P1/P2 8-6

Paper (printer)

fanfold 2-19

format 2-19

single sheet 2-19

Parameters (explanation) 20

Parity

balances 2-22

computer 2-23

terminal 2-25

printer 2-20 t

Peripherals (setup menu) 2-18

pH electrode

calibrating 26

slope 26

zero point 26

pH measurement 35

pH option


installing 10-11

measuring inputs (calibration data) 6-29

sensors 2-7

pH/mV-stat (function) 3-62

pH-stating (example) 3-65

Piston

assembling 10-4

inserting 10-4

Polarized sensors

adding 2-14

KF option 2-13

modifying 2-13

resource 2-13


Potential 1/2 (evaluation parameters) 3-35, 3-54

Potential measurement 6-4, 6-7

Predispensing







Index

Pretitration (pH/mV-stat function) 3-63

Primary standard 30, 31

Printer

ASCII 2-18

configuration 2-19, 2-20

connection 10-10

defining 2-18

Pt100/Pt1000 sensor 2-11

Pump

function 7-11

titration stand parameters 3-13

rate (solvents) 2-27

Q 8-4

QDISP 3-19, 8-7

QEND 8-4

QEX 8-4

QP1/QP2 8-4

QSTAT 8-6

QT1/QT2 8-6

QTOT 8-6

R (result) 3-66, 8-7

Range (equivalence point) 3-32, 3-51

Raw results

compilation 8-8

explanation 3-18

recording 3-75, 6-24

storage specification 8-20

Rear view of titrator 10-10

Recalculations 6-20

Recognition (equivalence point) 3-28, 3-50

Reevaluation

condition met 5-11

defining condition 3-35, 3-36, 3-55

performing 6-18

Reference electrode 2-7

Relative standard deviation srel 3-67

Remote control 6-42

Report

auxiliary function 6-24

function 3-74

header 6-27

Reset key 7, 5-12

Resources

changing 5-8


copying to titrator 6-39

deleting 2-3

DL58 7-3

explanation 2-3

list 2-3

modifying 2-3

printing 2-3


Result(s)


deleting 6-22

examples 3-67, 8-17

learn titration 5-9

maximum number/sample series 8-20

R 3-66, 3-71


Rx 6-20

storage specification 8-20

units 3-67, 8-17

Result list

displaying 6-18

exclusion 6-30

notes 5-9

Rinse

auxiliary function (ST20A) 6-10

tip (burette) 6-12


Routine (user level) 6-31

RS option

connection possibilities 10-11

installing 10-11

RS232 interface

GA42 printer 2-20

printer configuration 2-20

Run

analysis menu 5-3

key function 5-3

s (standard deviation) 8-7

Safety measures

for operational safety 5

for your protection 5, 10-3

Safety notes 1-1

Sample

function 3-12

ID (identification) 4-5, 5-6


Index

Samples

maximum number 8-20

status 4-7

Sample changer


connection 10-10

defining 2-25

sample series 5-6, 5-15

titration stand 2-17


Sample data

adding 4-8

deleting 4-6

entering 4-4, 5-5, 5-10

list 4-4, 4-6

memory (sample menu) 4-3

modifying 4-7

on computer 4-13

printing 4-7


storage specification 36, 4-3

Sample data mask

analysys menu 5-5

sample menu 4-5

Sample series

deleting 4-6

entering 4-4

with auto stand 5-6, 5-15

with ST20A 5-6, 5-15

Sample series (DL55/DL58)

entering 4-9

executing 5-15

Sample size 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3

Save (storage procedure)


devices for control intput 7-5

devices for control output 7-6

methods 3-7


sensors 2-10

solvents 2-28


titrants 2-6

Segmented (evaluation procedure)



explanation 8-15

Send mode (computer) 2-24

Sensor(s)

adding 2-10


deleting 2-7

modifying 2-7

order No. 11-10

pH option 2-7

resource 2-7


Sensor inputs


sensors 2-8


Separation time (two-phase titration function) 7-14

Sequential

activating control output (auxiliary function) 6-34


Setup (menu) 2-3

Shorten analysis sequence 6-30

SLOPE 8-3

Slope

calculation 3-69


explanation 2-9

minimum/maximum value 3-71

pH electrode 26

theoretical value 2-9

Slots 10-10

Software LabX 4-13, 6-41

Software version 1-1

Solvents

adding 2-28

deleting 2-27

modifying 2-27


Special methods

DL58 7-7

explanation 7-3

Speed

defining 3-16

modifying 5-8, 6-8

srel (relative standard deviation) 8-7

ST20A

connection 10-10

outputs 2-28

Stand 1/2 (titration stands) 2-17

Standard (evaluation procedure)



explanation 8-14

Standard deviation s 3-67


Index

Standard method(s)

application examples 22

explanation 19, 3-5

functions 20

modifying 25, 30

number 20

printing 3-5

Start/end character (computer) 2-24

Statistics

modifying 6-22

selecting for calculations 3-67

Status

remote control 6-42

peripherals 2-18

samples 4-7

Steepest jump only 3-31

Stir (function) 3-16

Stirrer

auxiliary function (stirrer) 6-8

output 2-17

speed 5-8, 6-8

Stirring time 3-16

Stop bits

computer 2-24

printer 2-20

terminal 2-25

Stop for reevaluation 3-35, 3-55, 5-11

Storage interval (pH/mV-stat function) 3-64

Storage procedure

measured values 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

raw results 8-20

results 8-20

sample data 4-3

Symbols

explanation 8-3

list 8-3

Sync (function) 7-18

Synchronization mode (Sync function) 7-18

System

computer/terminal 2-23

titrator (information) 9-3, 9-6

T (temperature) 7-10

t (titer) 3-72, 8-3

t(max)





temperature function 7-10

t(min)





temperature function 7-10

Table of measured values

displaying 5-7, 6-21


Technical data

burette 12-5

burette drive 12-5

Centronics socket 12-8

DIN socket 12-7

display 12-5

measurement system 12-3

memories 12-5

outputs 12-4

peripherals 12-6

RS232C connector (Centronics option) 12-7

RS232C socket (RS option) 12-9

stirrer 12-5

TTLIO sockets 12-7

Temperature

correction 3-13, 3-69

entering 2-9, 4-6, 5-6

function 7-10

measurement 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37,

3-62, 3-69, 7-10

measuring (auxiliary function) 6-5

Temperature sensor(s)

calibrating 6-6

Lemo cable plug 10-10

Pt100/Pt1000 2-11

resource 2-11

selecting 3-13


Tendency







Index

Terminal

configuration (keyboard) 10-16

configuration (titrator) 2-25

connection 10-11

key assignment 10-17

Termination (parameters)






Threshold 3-29, 3-51

Threshold value

evaluation procedure "Asymmetric" 3-30

evaluation procedure "Minimum/Maximum" 3-30

evaluation procedure "Segmented" 3-31

evaluation procedure "Standard" 3-30

TIME 5-4, 8-3

Time

entering 6-27

sample function (conditioning) 3-15

selecting format 6-26

stir function 3-16, 5-7

Time specification


methods 3-11

sensors 2-9


titrants 2-5

Timed increment measured value acquisition





Titer

checking 2-5

determination (NaOH solution) 32

entering 2-4


explanation 30

function 3-72

Title

function 3-11

METTLER methods 19

standard methods 19

Titrant

adding 2-6

concentration 2-4, 8-3

deleting 2-4

modifying 2-4


Titrant addition







Titrate

manually 6-14

manually (Ipol/Upol) 6-16

Titration curves

1st derivative 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

2nd derivative 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

displaying 5-8, 5-8, 6-21


Titration stand

equipping 10-9

meaning 7-8

order No. 11-7

resource 2-17

selecting 3-13

Titrator

battery 6

cleaning housing 10-3

connections 6, 10-10

documentation 4

front view 6

ID (identification) 6-27

internal clock 6

keypad 7

opening housing 10-3

rear view 6, 10-10

remote control 6-42

self test 7

settings 6-26

Transmission mode (balance)

bidirectional 2-21

unidirectional 2-21

TTL inputs

activating 6-32

wiring electronically 10-14

wiring mechanically 10-13

TTL outputs

activating 6-33

wiring electronically 10-14

TTLIO socket(s)


technical data 12-7

used by titrator 10-13

Turntable (sample changer) 6-10

Two-phase titration

function 7-12

special method 7-12


Index

Unidirectional transmission mode 2-21

Units 3-67, 8-17, 8-18

Units of measurement (sensors) 2-8

Urgent sample (DL55/DL58) 4-10

User data memory 12-5

User level 6-31

User method(s)


copying to titrator 6-39

deleting 3-6

explanation 19, 3-6

printing 3-6

"titer by EQP titration" 34


VDISP 3-19, 8-7

VEND 8-4

VEQ 8-4

VEX 8-4

Voltage measurement (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

Voltametric indication



Volume

entering 4-5, 5-6

selecting 3-12

Volume limits

at volume entry 4-5, 5-6

entering 3-12

VP1/VP2 8-4

VSTAT 8-6

VT 3-65, 8-6

VT1/VT2 8-6

VTOT 8-6

Wait time

predispensing 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 7-13

stir function 3-16, 5-7

Weight

entering 4-5, 5-6

selecting 3-12

transferred by balance 4-12

Weight limits

at weight entry 4-5, 5-6

entering 3-12

x (mean value) 8-7

z (equivalent number) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3

ZERO 8-3

Zero point (sensor)

calculation 3-69


explanation 2-9

pH electrode 26


Zero point (temperature sensor)


explanation 2-11



Indice

Indice

Los números separados por un guión (ejemplo 3-38) se refieren al capítulo correspondiente

en el Manual de Instrucciones, las cifras aisladas a la Guía de Manejo (ejemplo 9).

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10

∆E

func. medir 3-17

func. valoración EP 3-39

func. valoración EQP 3-25

func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

∆E (nom.)



∆t

func. medir 3-17




Accesorios

accesorios facultativos 11-7

equipo básico 11-4

Acondicionamiento (ST20A) 3-15

Activar

entrada mando a distancia 6-32

salida mando a distancia 6-33

Acumulador 6

Adición de reactivo

func. pH/mV-Stato 3-63


func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60



func. valoración en dos fases 7-14

Adquisición datos medidos: incremental tiempo





Agitador

función auxiliar (Stirrer) 6-8

seleccionar salida 2-17

Agitar (función) 3-16

Ajustar entradas de medida 6-28

Análisis

empezar 5-4

menú "Run" 5-3

se interrumpe 5-11

secuencia menú 5-4

terminar (Reset) 5-12

visualizar 5-11

Asimétrica (procedimiento de evaluación)

explicación 8-16

parámetro de evaluación, 3-34, 3-53

reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50

Asterisco (*) 3-4, 3-11

Avance

de línea (impresora) 2-19

de página (impresora) 2-19

Aviso de errores

con indicaciones en cáp. 9.1 9-3



valoración de aprendizaje 5-1

Avisos de seguridad 1-1

Balanza (s)

conectar 10-10

configuración (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22

configuración (SARTORIUS) 2-22

definir 2-21

Banda de control




Base de datos 12-5

Baudios

balanza 2-22

impresora 2-20

ordenador 2-23

terminal 2-25

Bits de datos

impresora 2-20

ordenador 2-24

terminal 2-25

Bits de parada

impresora 2-20

ordenador 2-24

terminal 2-25

Bomba

función 7-11

parámetros cabeza de valoración 3-13


Indice

Bureta

burbujas de aire 10-8

función auxiliar 6-11

insertar 10-6

instalar 10-4

llenar 13

llenar (lavar) 6-11

mantenimiento 10-4, 10-7

montaje 10-5

C (constante) 3-66, 8-7

c (concentración nominal) 8-3

c * t (concentración real) 8-3

Cabeza de val. auto

definición 2-17

serie(s) de muestras 5-6, 5-15

Cabeza de val. externa 2-17

Cabeza de valoración

medios auxiliares 2-17

montaje 10-8

número de pedido 11-7

seleccionar 3-13

significado 7-8

Cálculo posterior 6-20

Cálculo(s)

fórmulas 8-17

función 3-66

indicativos 8-9

realización (función auxiliar) 6-20

Calibración

electrodo de pH 27

función 3-69

sensores 3-69

sondas de temperatura 6-6

Cambiador de muestras

cabeza de valoración 2-17

conectar 10-10

definir 2-25

función auxiliar (Changer) 6-9


serie de muestras(s) 5-6, 5-15

Cambiar: mando (<F4>) 10

Cambio de buretas: ver buretas

Cambio de lengua 11, 6-27

Centronics: ver interface/tarjeta

Código (func. sincronización) 7-18

Código de barras 6-43

Coeficiente de correlación 3-62, 3-65, 8-6

Combinación de teclas 10

Concentración (reactivo) 2-4, 8-3

Concepto

de manejo 7

de métodos 19

Conductímetro 2-8

Constantes

ejemplo 8-18

función auxiliar cálculo 6-20

función cálculo 3-66

Continua (adición de reactivo) 3-40, 3-60

Control de entrada

activar salida mando a distancia (función auxiliar)

6-33

func. salida mando a distancia 7-16

Control de equilibrio (adquisición de los valores

medidos)

func. medir 3-17




Copia de la memoria

carga al titulador 6-39

copia a la tarjeta memoria 6-39

transferir al ordenador 6-41

Criterios de terminación combinados 3-34, 3-53

CSTAT (coeficiente de correlación) 3-62, 8-6

Curso del análisis (ejemplo )

calibración electrodos de pH 27

comparación: Cabeza de valoración 1/ST20A

5-16

con cambiador de muestras 5-17

determinación CaCl 2 5-7

determinación del contenido HCl 12

determinación del título (NaOH) 32

regulación del pH 5-10

Cursor 10

Curvas de valoración

1ª derivada 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

2ª derivada 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

impresión 3-75, 6-24

visualización 5-7, 5-8, 6-21

Cx (constantes de cálculo) 8-7

Data Transfer (transmisión de datos) 6-36

Datos de calibración

entradas de medida 6-29

sensores 2-9, 2-10, 3-69


Datos de muestra

añadir 4-8

borrar 4-6

cambiar 4-7

condiciones de memorización 36, 4-3

desde ordenador 4-13

entrar 4-4, 5-5, 5-10

imprimir 4-7

informe 3-75, 6-24

lista 4-4, 4-6

memoria (menú Sample) 4-4, 5-5, 5-10


Indice

Datos técnicos

agitador 12-5

buretas 12-5

conector Centronics 12-8

conector DIN 12-7

conector RS232C (tarjeta RS) 12-9

conector TTLIO 12-7

enchufe RS232C (tarjeta Centronics) 12-7

memorias 12-5

motor de bureta 12-5

pantalla 12-5

periféricos 12-6

salidas 12-4

sistema de medida 12-3

Deriva (medida del potencial) 3-17

Desviación estándar relativa (srel) 3-67

Desviación estándar (s) 3-67

Dinámica (adición de reactivo)



Directorio (tarjeta memoria) 6-37

Diversos (Misc. ...) 6-26

DLWin Software 4-13, 6-41

DL58

funciones 7-3

mandos 7-3


Documentación

información 4

Dosificación

continua 6-13

continua (Ipol/Upol) 6-15

Dosificación previa






Dosificar

función 3-19

función auxiliar (buretas) 6-12

función auxiliar (ST20A) 6-10

E (potencial) 3-17, 8-7

EHNV (valor de semineutralización) 3-20, 8-4

Electrodo de referencia 2-7

Electrodos (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13

Electrodos de pH

calibrar 26

pendiente 26

punto cero 26

Electrodos polarizados

almacenar 2-13

añadir 2-14

cambiar 2-13

tarjeta KF 2-13


Embolo

colocación 10-4

montaje 10-4

Encabezamiento de informe 6-27

Entrada mando a distancia

activar (función auxiliar) 6-32

función 7-15

Entradas de sensores


sensores 2-8

sensores polarizados 2-13

Entradas mando a distancia

definir 7-4


Entrar tiempo

métodos 3-11

reactivo 2-5

sensor de temperatura 2-11

sensores 2-9

valores auxiliares 2-15

EP

absoluto 3-41

relativo 3-41

EPOT 8-4

Esc (salir) mando (<F1>) 9

Estadísticas

cambiar 6-22

incluir en el cálculo 3-67

Estado

mando a distancia 6-42

muestras 4-7

periféricos 2-18

Están definidos (máscara)

bloquear 6-30

significado 5-5

Estándar (procedimiento de evaluación)

explicación 8-14

parámetro de evaluación 3-34, 3-53


3-50

ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

Evaluación





Indice

Evaluación posterior

condición satisfecha 5-11

definir una condición 3-35, 3-36, 3-55

ejecución 6-18

Experto (nivel de usuario) 6-31

Extinción 2-8

f (factor de corrección) 4-6, 5-6, 8-3

Fallos 9-6

Fecha

entrar 6-27

seleccionar formato 6-26

Fecha caducidad (reactivo) 5-4

Forma de control (activar salida mando a distancia)

control por entrada 6-33

marcha/parada 6-33

secuencial 6-34

Forma de control (func. salida mando a distancia)

control por entrada 7-16

marcha/parada 7-16

secuencial 7-17

tiempo fijo 7-16

Fórmula(s)

constantes 8-18

función auxiliar cálculos 6-20

función cálculo 3-66

función título 3-72

función valores auxiliares 3-73

para limitar los puntos de equivalencia 8-19

resultados 8-17

Función(es)

añadir 7-8

borrar 7-8

cambiar 3-10

DL58 7-3

explicación 20, 3-3

número máximo 7-9

seleccionar 3-7

visión de conjunto 24

Funciones auxiliares

explicación 9, 6-3

teclas 6-3

visión de conjunto 1-4, 1-5

Funciones de cálculo 3-66

H (valor auxiliar) 2-15, 8-3

Hoja de datos

tarjeta KF 10-12

tarjeta pH 10-12

ID métodos

cambiar 3-9

definir 3-11

entrar 4-4, 5-5

explicación 3-4

métodos estándar 3-5

métodos METTLER 3-6

ID muestras 4-5, 5-6

Impresora

ASCII 2-18

conectar 10-10

configuración 2-19, 2-20

definir 2-18

In 3.1/3.2 (entradas TTL) 6-32

Incremental (adición de reactivo) 3-24, 3-48, 7-14

Indicación



Indicación amperométrica



Indicación de fecha

métodos 3-11

reactivo 2-5

sensores 2-9



Indicación voltamétrica



Indicativos (forma)

ejemplos 8-9, 8-10

resumen 8-12

Informe

función 3-74

función auxiliar (Report) 6-24

Informe de comunicación (ordenador) 2-24

Instalación (menú Setup) 2-3

Instalación y mantenimiento 10-3

Instrucción

función 7-11

función salida mando a distancia 7-17

Interface Centronics

configuración impresora 2-19

impresora GA42 2-18

Interface RS232

configuración impresora 2-20

impresora GA42 2-20

Interpolación (evaluación) 8-14

Intervalo (acondicionamiento) 3-15

Intervalo de memorización (func. pH/mV-Stato)

3-64


Indice

Juego de caracteres (ordenador) 2-24

LabX Software 4-13, 6-41

Lector de código de barras

conectar 10-16

definir 2-24

Lengua (cambiar) 11, 6-27

Límites de peso

entrar 3-12

en entrada de muestra 4-5, 5-6

Límites volumen

en entrada de muestras 4-5, 5-6

entrar 3-12

Lista (aclaración) 8

Lista datos de muestras 4-4, 4-6

Lista de resultado

avisos 5-9

bloquear 6-30

visualizar 6-18

Llenar (lavar)

función auxiliar (ST20A) 6-10


Llenar punta (bureta) 6-12

M (masa molar) 3-68, 8-3

m (tamaño muestra) 8-3

Mando a distancia 6-42

Mantenimiento

bureta 10-7

titulador 10-3

Manual (entrada de temperatura) 3-13

Marcha/Parada


6-33


Márgenes (informe) 2-19

Masa molar M

entrar 3-13

func. cálculo 3-68

Máscara (aclaración) 8

Máscara datos de muestras

menú análisis 5-5

menú muestras 4-5

Máximo (procedimiento de evaluación)

explicación 8-14

parámetro evaluación 3-34, 3-53


3-50

Medición del voltaje (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

Medida

de la conductividad 2-8

de la corriente (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

del pH 35

del potencial 6-4, 6-7

Medidas de seguridad

en el puesto de trabajo 5

para su protección 5, 10-3

Medios auxiliares

borrar 2-3

cambiar 2-3, 5-8

copiar en titulador 6-39

DL58 7-3

explicación 2-3

imprimir 2-3

lista 2-3

transferir a ordenador 6-41

Medir (función) 3-17

Memoria de datos

de muestras (menú Sample) 4-3

de usuario 12-5

Memorización

datos de muestras 4-3

electrodos polarizados 2-13

instrumento para entrada mando a distancia 7-5

instrumento para salida mando a distancia 7-6

métodos 3-7

reactivos 2-6

resultados 8-20

resultados sin elaborar 8-20

sensores 2-10

solventes 2-28



valores medidos 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Memorizar valor auxiliar 3-73

Menús

explicación 8

teclas 8

visión de conjunto 1-2, 1-3


Indice

Método

almacenar 3-7

borrar 3-5

cambiar 3-7

cambiar ( método en curso: DL55/DL58) 5-13

cambiar (actual serie de muestras) 5-12

desde ordenador 4-5

desde tarjeta memoria 4-5

elaboración 24

explicación 3-3

imprimir 3-4

Métodos

imprimir lista 3-4

menú 3-3

seleccionar 3-4

Método(s) del usuario

borrar 3-6

copiar en la tarjeta memoria 6-38

copiar en titulador 6-39


imprimir 3-6

título con valoración EQP 34

transferir a ordenador 6-41

Método(s) estándar

cambiar 25, 30

ejemplo de uso 22


funciones 20

imprimir 3-5

número 20

Métodos especiales

DL58 7-7

explicación 7-3

Métodos METTLER

90001: Ejecución 14

90002: Ejecución 27

cambiar 25, 3-6

explicación 19

imprimir 3-6

Mínimo (procedimiento de evaluación)

explicación 8-14



3-50

Misc. ... (Diversos) 6-26

Motor de bureta

instalar 10-3

seleccionar 2-5

Muestra

función 3-12

menú memoria de datos de muestras 4-3

en curso (máscara): aviso 5-6

urgente (DL55) 4-10

Muestras

estado 4-7

número máximo 8-20

neq (número punto(s) de equivalencia) 8-4

Nivel de usuario 6-31

Nombre

función 3-11

métodos estándar 19

métodos METTLER- 19

Número de equivalencia

entrada 3-13

func. cálculo 3-68

OK mando (<F5>) 9

Ordenador

código de barras (string) 6-43

conectar 10-10

configuración 2-23

lector de código de barras 2-24


transmisión de datos 6-40

Out 3.1...3.4 (salidas TTL) 6-33

P1/P2 8-6

Papel (impresora)

formato 2-19

hojas únicas 2-19

papel sin fin 2-19

Parada para evaluación posterior 3-35, 3-55, 5-11

Parada pospuesta 3-42, 3-61

Parámetros (aclaración) 20

Paridad

balanza 2-22

impresora 2-20

ordenador 2-23

terminal 2-25

Parte trasera del titulador 10-9

Pendiente

cálculo 3-69

electrodo de pH 26

explicación 2-9

registrar 2-9

valor máximo/mínimo 3-71

valor teórico 2-9


Indice

Periféricos (menú Setup) 2-18

Peso

entrar 4-5, 5-6

seleccionar 3-12

transmisión desde balanza 4-12

pH-stato (ejemplo) 3-65

pH/mV-Stato (función) 3-62

Plato giratorio (cambiador de muestras) 6-10

Posición elevador (cambiador de muestras) 6-9

Potencial

1/2 (parámetros de evaluación) 3-35, 3-54

inicial ET1 3-22

Proceso de evaluación

explicación 8-14

func. valoración EQP 3-28, 3-34

func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53

Punto cero (sensor)

cálculo 3-69

electrodo de pH 26

explicación 2-9

registrar 2-9

valor teórico 2-9

Punto cero (sensor de temperatura)

explicación 2-11

registrar 2-12

valor teórico 2-12

Punto de equivalencia

explicación 3-20, 3-45, 8-14

fórmulas para restricción 8-19

número máx./determinación muestras 8-20

rango 3-32, 3-51

reconocimiento 3-28, 3-50

Punto de inflexión 8-14

Punto final




Puntos de medida para reconocimiento del punto

de equivalencia 3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Q 8-4

QDISP 3-19, 8-7

QEND 8-4

QEX 8-4

QP1/QP2 8-4

QSTAT 8-6

QT1/QT2 8-6

QTOT 8-6

R (Resultado) 3-66, 8-7

Rango

punto de equivalencia 3-32, 3-51

punto final 3-40, 3-60

Rango de regulación




Ranuras 10-9

Reactivo

almacenar 2-6

añadir 2-6

borrar 2-4

cambiar 2-4

concentración 2-4, 8-3

Reconocimiento (punto de equivalencia) 3-28,

3-50

Reducción curso del análisis 6-30

Registro (tarjeta memoria) 6-37

Reloj (titulador) 6

Report (informe) 6-24

Reset (tecla) 7, 5-12

Resultado(s)

borrar 6-22

condiciones de memorización 8-20

ejemplos 3-67, 8-17

función auxiliar (Results) 6-18

hacer un informe 3-75, 6-24

número máximol/serie de muestras 8-20

R 3-66, 3-71

Rx 6-20

unidades 3-67, 8-17

valoración de aprendizaje 5-9

Resultados sin elaborar

condiciones de memorización 8-20

explicación 3-18


resumen 8-8

Results (Resultados) 6-18

Run

menú análisis 5-3

teclas función 5-3

Rutina (nivel de usuario) 6-31


Indice

s (desviación estándar) 8-7

Salida mando a distancia

activar (función auxiliar) 6-33

función 7-16

Salidas mando a distancia

definir 7-5


Secuencial


6-34

función salida mando a distancia 7-16

Segmentada (procedimiento de evaluación)

explicación 8-15



3-50

Señal

acústica 6-28

de entrada (func. entrada mando a distancia)

7-15

Sensor(es)

almacenar 2-10

añadir 2-10

borrar 2-7

cambiar 2-7

función auxiliar 6-4


pH tarjeta 2-7

Serie de muestras

borrar 4-6

con cabeza val. auto 5-6, 5-15

con ST20A 5-6, 5-15

entrar 4-4

Serie de muestras (DL55/DL58)

ejecución 5-15

entrar 4-9

Setup (menú instalación) 2-3

Símbolo inicial/final (ordenador) 2-24

Símbolos

explicación 8-3

lista 8-3

Sincronización (función) 7-18

Sistema

información 9-3, 9-6

ordenador/terminal 2-23

SLOPE (pendiente de electrodos) 8-3


Sólo salto más abrupto 3-31

Soluciones tampón

tampones DIN/NIST 3-70

tampones MERCK 3-69

tampones METTLER TOLEDO 3-69

Solventes

almacenar 2-28

añadir 2-28

borrar 2-27

cambiar 2-27

Sonda de temperatura

almacenar 2-12

calibrar 6-6

enchufe Lemo 10-10


Pt100/Pt1000 2-11

seleccionar 3-13

srel (desviación estándar relativa) 8-7

ST20A

conectar 10-10

salidas 2-28

Stand 1/2 (cabezas de valoración) 2-17

Stirrer (agitador) 6-8

Sustancia patrón 30, 31

T (temperatura) 7-10

t (título) 3-72, 8-3

t(máx)

func. medir 3-18

func. temperatura 7-10




t(mín)

func. medir 3-17

func. temperatura 7-10




Tabla de valores medidos


visualizar 5-7, 6-21

Tamaño de muestras 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3

Tarjeta Centronics

installación 10-10

posibilidades de conexión 10-9


Indice

Tarjeta KF

electrodos polarizados 2-13

entradas de medida: datos de calibración 6-29

entradas y salidas 10-10

instalar 10-11

Tarjeta memoria

directorio 6-37

formatización 6-36, 6-40

inserción 10-11

interface 12-6

tipos 12-6

uso 6-36

Tarjeta pH

entradas de medida: datos de calibración 6-29


instalar 10-11

sensores 2-7

Tarjeta RS

instalación 10-11

posibilidades de conexión 10-11

Tecla(s)

de entrada 10

flecha 7

Reset 7, 5-12

de mandos 9

Teclado (titulador) 7

Teclado externo

asignación de las teclas 10-15

conectar 10-15

definir 2-26

Temperatura

corrección 3-13, 3-69

entrar 2-9, 4-6, 5-6

función 7-10

medir 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37, 3-62, 3-69,

7-10

medir (función auxiliar) 6-5

Tendencia






Terminación (parámetros)






Terminal

asignación de teclas 10-17

conectar 10-11

configuración 10-16

sincronización 2-25

Tiempo

entrar 6-27

func. agitar 3-16, 5-7

func. muestra (acondicionar) 3-15

seleccionar formato 6-26

Tiempo

de agitación 3-16

de espera 3-16

de mezcla (func. valoración en dos fases) 7-14

de separación (func. valoración en dos fases)

7-14

fijo (func. salida mando a distancia) 7-16

máx. (func. entrada mando a distancia) 7-15

máximo (func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol)) 3-61

TIME 5-4, 8-3

Tipo de medición




Tipo de sincronización (func. sincronización) 7-18

Tipo de transmisión (balanza)

bidireccional 2-21

unidireccional 2-21

Tipo de transmisión (ordenador) 2-24

Titulador

acumulador 6

apertura de la carcasa 10-3

autotest 7

conexiones 6, 10-10

configuración 6-26

documentación 4

ID (identificación ) 6-27

limpieza de la carcasa 10-3


reloj interno 6

teclado 7

vista frontal 6

vista trasera 6, 10-10

Título

controlar 2-5

determinación (disolución NaOH) 32

entrar 2-4

explicación 30

función 3-72

registrar 2-4

Transmisión de datos (Data Transfer) 6-36


Indice

TTL (entradas)

activar 6-32

cableado electrónico 10-14

cableado mecánico 10-13

TTL (salidas)

activar 6-33

cableado electrónico 10-14

TTLIO (conectores)

datos técnicos 12-7


usado con titulador 10-13

Umbral 3-29, 3-51

Unidad de medida (sensores) 2-8

Unidades 3-67, 8-17, 8-18

Valoración

a punto de equivalencia 3-20, 3-45

a punto final 3-37, 3-56

de aprendizaje función 3-43

en dos fases función 7-12

EP (función) 3-37

EP (Ipol/Upol) (función) 3-56

EQP (función) 3-20

EQP (Ipol/Upol) (función) 3-45

manual 6-14

manual (Ipol/Upol) 6-16

método especial 7-12

previa (func. pH/mV-Stato) 3-63

resultados 5-9

Valoraciones Karl-Fischer

accesorios 11-12

Valor del umbral

procedimiento de evaluación estándar 3-30

procedimiento de evaluación: asimétrica 3-30

procedimiento de evaluación: mínimo/máximo

3-30

procedimiento de evaluación: segmentada 3-31

Valor de semineutralización 3-20

Valor medio x

func. cálculo 3-67

func. título 3-72

func. valor auxiliar 3-73

Valor(es) auxiliar(es)

almacenar 2-16

entrar 2-15

función 3-73


registrar 2-15

Valores medidos

instrucciones para memorización 3-64, 3-74,

8-20

número máximo/func. valoración 8-20

visualizar 5-7, 6-21

VDISP 3-19, 8-7

Velocidad bombeo (solventes) 2-27

Velocidad de agitación

cambiar 5-8, 6-8

definir 3-16

VEND 8-4

VEQ 8-4

Version software 1-1

VEX 8-4

Volumen

entrar 4-5, 5-6

seleccionar 3-12

Volumen bureta

incremento mínimo 3-24

seleccionar 2-5

Volumen fijo

aviso 5-5

seleccionar 3-12

Volumen máximo






VP1/VP2 8-4

VSTAT 8-6

VT 3-65, 8-6

VT1/VT2 8-6

VTOT 8-6

x (valor medio) 8-7

z (valencia, nº de equivalencia) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3

ZERO (punto cero, electrodo) 8-3


Indice analitico

Indice analitico

I numeri separati da un trattino (esempio: 3-38) si riferiscono alle sezioni e pagine del manuale

d'uso, mentre i numeri senza trattino si riferiscono alle istruzioni di base (esempio: 9).

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10

∆E

funzione Misurare 3-17

funzione Titolazione EP 3-39

funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25

funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

∆E(nom.)



∆t





Abbreviare l’analisi 6-30

Accessori

accessori facoltativi 11-7

equipaggiamento di base 11-4

Accumulatore 6

Aggiunta di titolante

funzione pH/mV-Stat 3-63

funzione Titolazione a due fasi 7-14


funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60



Agitare (funzione) 3-16

Agitatore

funzione ausiliaria (Stirrer) 6-8

selezionare l’uscita 2-17

Allineamento degli ingressi di misura 6-28

Analisi

arresto 5-11

eclissare 5-11

inizio 5-4

interrompere (Reset) 5-12

menu „Run“ 5-3

svolgimento del menu 5-4

Arresto (parametri di)






Arresto per rivalutazione 3-35, 3-55, 5-11

Asimmetrico (procedura di valutazione)

parametro di valutazione 3-34, 3-53

riconoscimento del punto d’equivalenza 3-28,

3-50

spiegazione 8-16

Asterisco (*) 3-4, 3-11

Attivare

entrata comando a distanza 6-32

uscita comando a distanza 6-32

Autocampionatore

collegare 10-10

definire 2-25

funzione ausiliaria (Changer) 6-9

parametri dello stativo di titolazione 3-13

serie di campioni 5-6, 5-15

stativo di titolazione 2-17

Avanzamento

della pagina (stampante) 2-19

delle linee (stampante) 2-19

Banca dati 12-5

Banda di controllo




Bidirezionale (modo di trasmissione) 2-21, 4-12

Bilancia(e)

collegare 10-10

configurazioni (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22

configurazioni (SARTORIUS) 2-22

definire 2-21

Buretta

bolle d’aria 10-8

inserire 10-6

installare 10-4

lavare 6-11

manutenzione 10-4, 10-7

montare 10-5

riempire 13

Burette (buretta, funz. ausil.) 6-11


Indice analitico

C (costante) 3-66, 8-7

c (conc. nominale) 8-3

c * t (conc. reale) 8-3

Calcoli supplementari 6-20

Calcolo(i)

eseguire (funzione ausiliaria) 6-20

formule 8-17

funzione 3-66

indici 8-9

Calibrare

elettrodo pH 27

funzione 3-69

sonde 3-69

sonde della temperatura 6-6

Cambiare la lingua 11, 6-27

Campione (funzione) 3-12

Campione attuale (maschera)

indicazioni 5-6

Campione urgente (DL55/DL58) 4-10

Campioni

numero massimo 8-20

stato 4-7

Campo (punto di equivalenza) 3-32, 3-51

Campo di regolazione




Carattere iniziale/finale (computer) 2-24

Carta (stampante)

formato 2-19

infinito 2-19

pagina singola 2-19

Changer (autocampionatore, funz. ausil.) 6-9

Code (funzione Sync) 7-18

Codice a barre 6-43

Coefficiente di correlazione 3-62, 3-65, 8-6

Comando a distanza 6-42

Combinazioni di tasti 10

Computer

codice a barre 6-43

collegare 10-10

comando a distanza 6-42

configurazione (titolatore) 2-23

lettore di codici a barre 2-24

trasmissione dei dati 6-40

Concentrazione (titolante) 2-4, 8-3

Concetto

d’impiego 7

di metodo 19

Condizionare (ST20A) 3-15

Condizioni di arresto combinate 3-34, 3-53

Conduttimetro 2-8

Connettore(i) TTLIO

dati tecnici 12-7

ingressi ed uscite 10-13

utilizzati dal titolatore 10-13

Continua (aggiunta di titolante) 3-40, 3-60

Controllo dall’ingresso

attivare l’uscita comando a distanza (funzione

ausiliaria) 6-33

funzione Uscita comando a distanza 7-16

Copia(e) della memoria

caricare sul titolatore 6-39

copiare su scheda di memoria 6-39

trasferire al computer 6-41

Costanti

esempi 8-18

funzione ausiliaria Calcoli 6-20

funzione Calcolo 3-66

CSTAT (coefficiente di correlazione, pH-Stat)

3-62, 8-6

Cursore 10

Curve di titolazione

1 a derivata 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

2 a derivata 3-31, 3-54, 8-15

documentare 3-75, 6-24

visualizzare 5-7, 5-8, 6-21

Cx (costante di calcolo) 8-7

Data

introdurre 6-27

selezionare il formato 6-26

Data (indicazione)

metodi 3-11

sonde 2-9


titolanti 2-5

valori ausiliari 2-15

Data di scadenza (titolante) 5-4

Data Transfer (trasferimento dei dati, funz. ausil.)

6-36

Dati di calibrazione

ingressi di misura 6-29

sonde 2-9, 2-10, 3-69


Dati dei campioni

aggiungere 4-8

cancellare 4-6

condizioni di memorizzazione 36, 4-3

definire dal computer 4-13


introdurre 4-4, 5-5, 5-10

modificare 4-7

stampare 4-7


Indice analitico

Dati tecnici

agitatore 12-5

buretta 12-5

connettore Centronics 12-8

connettore RS232C (Opzione RS) 12-9

connettori TTLIO 12-7

display 12-5

connettore DIN 12-7

memoria 12-5

motore della buretta 12-5

periferiche 12-6

sistema di misura 12-3

spina RS232C (Opzione Centronics) 12-7

uscite 12-4

Deriva (misura del potenziale) 3-17

Deviazione standard relativa srel 3-67

Deviazione standard s 3-67

Dinamica (aggiunta di titolante)



Disturbi 9-6

DL58

comandi 7-3

funzioni 7-3

mezzi ausiliari 7-3

DLWin Software 4-13, 6-41

Documentazione

informazioni 4

Dosaggio

continuo 6-13

continuo (Ipol/Upol) 6-15

Dosare

funzione 3-19

funzione ausiliaria (buretta) 6-12

funzione ausiliaria (ST20A) 6-10

E (potenziale) 3-17, 8-7

ESC (<F1>) 9

EHNV (valore di semineutralizzazione) 3-20, 8-4

Elettrodi (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13

Elettrodo di riferimento 2-7

Elettrodo per pH

calibrare 26

pendenza 26

punto zero 26

Emissione (protocolli) 3-74, 6-24

EP

assoluto 3-41

relativo 3-41

EPOT 8-4

Esperto (livello utente) 6-31

Estinzione 2-8

ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

f (fattore di correzione) 4-6, 5-6, 8-3

Formula(e)

costanti 8-18

funzione ausiliaria Calcoli 6-20


funzione Titolo 3-72

funzione Valore ausiliario 3-73

per circoscrivere il punto di equivalenza 8-19

risultati 8-17

Funzione(i)

aggiungere 7-8

cancellare 7-8

DL58 7-3

modificare 3-10

numero massimo 7-9

riassunto 24

selezionare 3-7

spiegazione 20, 3-3

Funzioni ausiliarie

riassunto 1-4, 1-5

spiegazione 9, 6-3

tasti 6-3

Funzioni di calcolo 3-66

H (valore ausiliario) 2-15, 8-3

ID (identificazione) dei metodi

definire 3-11

introdurre 4-4, 5-5

metodi METTLER 3-6

metodi standard 3-5

modificare 3-9

spiegazione 3-4

ID del campione 4-5, 5-6

In 3.1/3.2 (ingressi TTL) 6-32

In funzione/stop (modo di controllo)

attivare uscita comando a distanza (funzione

ausiliaria) 6-33


Incrementale (aggiunta di titolante) 3-24, 3-48,

7-14

Indicazione



Indicazione amperometrica



Indicazione del tempo

metodi 3-11

sonde 2-9


titolanti 2-5



Indice analitico

Indicazione voltametrica



Indicazioni di sicurezza 1-1

Indice (scheda di memoria) 6-37

Indici

esempi 8-9, 8-10

riassunto 8-12

Ingressi del comando a distanza

definire 7-4

mezzi ausiliari 7-4

Ingressi TTL

attivare 6-32

avvolg. elettronico („wiring“) 10-14

avvolg. meccanico 10-13

Ingresso del comando a distanza

attivare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-32

funzione 7-15

Ingresso delle sonde

sonde 2-8


sonde polarizzate 2-13

Installazione (menu "Setup") 2-3

Installazione e manutenzione 10-3

Interfaccia Centronics

configurazioni delle stampanti 2-19

stampante GA42 2-18

Interfaccia RS232

configurazioni delle stampanti 2-20

stampante GA42 2-20

Interpolazione (valutazione) 8-14

Intervallo (condizionare) 3-15

Intervallo di memorizzazione (funz. pH/mV-Stat)

3-64

Istruzione

ESC (<F1>) 9

funz. Uscita comando a distanza 7-17

funzione 7-11

OK (<F5>) 9

modificare (<F4>) 10

LabX Software 4-13, 6-41

Lavare

funzione ausiliaria (ST20A) 6-10


la punta 6-12

Lettore di codici a barre

collegare 10-16

definire 2-24

Limiti di peso

introdurre 3-12

introduzione dei dati dei campioni 4-5, 5-6

Limiti di volume

introdurre 3-12

introduzione dei dati dei campioni 4-5, 5-6

Linee di cornice (protocollo) 2-19

Lingua (cambiare) 11, 6-27

Lista dei dati dei campioni 4-4, 4-6

Lista dei risultati

bloccare 6-30

indicazioni 5-9

visualizzare 6-18

Liste (spiegazione) 8

Livello utente 6-31

M (massa molare) 3-68, 8-3

m (quantità del campione) 8-3

Manuale (introduzione della temperatura) 3-13

Manutenzione

buretta 10-7

titolatore 10-3

Maschera dei dati del campione

menu Analisi 5-5

menu "Sample" 4-5

Maschere (spiegazione) 8

Massa molare M

introdurre 3-13


Massimo (procedura di valutazione)

parametri di valutazione 3-34, 3-53

riconoscimento del punto d’equivalenza 3-28,

3-50

spiegazione 8-14

Memoria dei dati dei campioni (menu "Sample")

4-3

Memoria dei dati utente 12-5

Memoria dei valori ausiliari 3-73

Memorizzare

dati dei campioni 4-3

metodi 3-7

risultati 8-20

risultati grezzi 8-20

sensori polarizzati 2-13

solventi 2-28

sonde 2-10


strumenti per ingresso comando a distanza 7-5

strumenti per uscita comando a distanza 7-6

titolanti 2-6


valori misurati 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Menus

riassunto 1-2, 1-3

spiegazione 8

tasti 8


Indice analitico

Messaggi di errore

con riferimento al cap. 9.1 9-3



Titolazione in auto-studio 5-11

Metodi

menu 3-3

selezionare 3-4

stampare la lista 3-4

Metodi METTLER

90001: Esecuzione 14

90002: Esecuzione 27

modificare 25, 3-6

spiegazione 19

stampare 3-6

Metodi speciali

DL58 7-7

spiegazione 7-3

Metodi standard

esempi di applicazione 22

funzioni 20

modificare 25, 30

numero 20

spiegazione 19, 3-5

stampare 3-5

Metodi utente

cancellare 3-6


copiare sul titolatore 6-39

spiegazione 19, 3-6

stampare 3-6

titolo con titolazione EQP 34


Metodo

a partire dal computer 4-5

cancellare 3-5

memorizzare 3-7

modificare 3-7

modificare (metodo in corso: DL55/DL58) 5-13

modificare (serie di campioni in corso) 5-12

realizzare 24

spiegazione 3-3

stampare 3-4

sulla scheda di memoria 4-5

Mezzi ausiliari

cambiare 5-8

cancellare 2-3


copiare sul titolatore 6-39

DL58 7-3

lista 2-3

modificare 2-3

spiegazione 2-3

stampare 2-3


Minimo (procedura di valutazione)


riconoscimento del punto di equivalenza 3-28,

3-50

spiegazione 8-14

Misc. ... (Varia) 6-26

Misura controllata all’equilibrio





Misura in modo incrementale (tempo)





Misurare

funzione 3-17

il pH 35

il potenziale 6-4, 6-7

la corrente (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

la tensione (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

Misure di conducibilità 2-8

Misure di sicurezza

per la sicurezza sul lavoro 5

per la Sua incolumità 5, 10-3

Modificare: istruzione (<F4>) 10

Modo di controllo (attivare uscita TTL)

controllato dall’entrata 6-33

in funzione/stop 6-33

sequenziale 6-34

Modo di controllo (uscite TTL)

controllato dall’entrata 7-16

in funzione/stop 7-16

sequenziale 7-17

tempo fisso 7-16

Modo di misura




Modo di sincronizzazione (funzione Sync) 7-18

Modo di trasmissione (computer) 2-24

Modo di trasmissione (bilancia)

bidirezionale 2-21

unidirezionale 2-21

Motore della buretta

inserire 10-3

selezionare 2-5


Indice analitico

neq (numero di punti di equivalenza) 8-4

No. bits dei dati

computer 2-24

stampante 2-20

terminale 2-25

No. bits di stop

computer 2-24

stampante 2-20

terminale 2-25

Numero di equivalenza


introdurre 3-13

OK (<F5>) 9

Opzione Centronics

installare 10-10

possibilità di collegamento 10-9

Opzione KF

ingressi di misura: dati di calibrazione 6-29


installare 10-11

sonde polarizzate 2-13

Opzione pH

ingressi di misura: dati di calibrazione 6-29


installare 10-11

sonde 2-7

Opzione RS

installare 10-11

possibilità di collegamento 10-11

Orologio (titolatore) 6

Out 3.1...3.4 (uscite TTL) 6-33

P1/P2 8-6

Parametri (spiegazione) 20

Parità

bilance 2-22

computer 2-23

stampante 2-20

terminale 2-25

Pendenza

calcolo 3-69

elettrodo per pH 26

spiegazione 2-9

trascrizione automatica 2-9

valore minimo/massimo 3-71

valore teorico 2-9

Periferiche (menu "Setup") 2-18

Peso

introdurre 4-5, 5-6

selezionare 3-12

trasferire dalla bilancia 4-12

pH-Stat (esempio) 3-65

pH/mV-Stat (funzione) 3-62

Piatto rotante (autocampionatore) 6-10

Pistone

inserire nella buretta 10-4

montare 10-4

Pompe

funzione 7-11


Posizione del lift (autocampionatore) 6-9

Posizioni delle opzioni 10-9

Potenziale

1/2 (parametri di valutazione) 3-35, 3-54

iniziale ET1 3-22

Predosaggio






Pretitolazione (funzione pH/mV-Stat) 3-63

Procedura di valutazione

funzione Titolazione EQP 3-28, 3-34

funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53

spiegazione 8-14

Protocollo

funzione 3-74

funzione ausiliaria (Report) 6-24

di comunicazione (computer) 2-24

Punti di misura

condizioni di memorizzazione 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

numero massimo/funz. Titolazione 8-20

visualizzare 5-7, 6-21

Punti di misura per il riconoscimento del punto di

equivalenza 3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Punto di inflessione 8-14

Punto finale




Punto zero (sonda)

calcolo 3-69

elettrodo per pH 26

spiegazione 2-9


valore teorico 2-9

Punto zero (sonda della temperatura)

spiegazione 2-11


valore teorico 2-12


Indice analitico

Punto(i) di equivalenza

campo 3-32, 3-51

formule per circoscrivere 8-19

numero massimo/determinazione di campioni

8-20

riconoscimento 3-28, 3-50

spiegazione 3-20, 3-45, 8-14

Q 8-4

QDISP 3-19, 8-7

QEND 8-4

QEX 8-4

QP1/QP2 8-4

QSTAT 8-6

QT1/QT2 8-6

QTOT 8-6

Quantità del campione 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3

R (risultati) 3-66, 8-7

Report (protocollo) 6-24

Reset (tasto) 7, 5-12

Results (risultati) 6-18

Riconoscimento (punto di equivalenza) 3-28, 3-50

Risultati grezzi

condizioni di memorizzazione 8-20


riassunto 8-8

spiegazione 3-18

Risultato(i)

cancellare 6-22

condizioni di memorizzazione 8-20


esempi 3-67, 8-17

funzione ausiliaria (Results) 6-18

numero massimo/serie di campioni 8-20

R 3-66, 3-71

Rx 6-20

titolazione in auto-studio 5-9

unità 3-67, 8-17

Ritardo nell’arresto 3-42, 3-61

Rivalutazione

condizione soddisfatta 5-11

definire la condizione 3-35, 3-36, 3-55

eseguire 6-18

Routine (livello utente) 6-31

Run

funzione dei tasti 5-3

menu Analisi 5-3

s (deviazione standard) 8-7

Sample (menu Memoria dei dati dei campioni) 4-3

Scheda di memoria

formattare 6-36, 6-40

indice 6-37

inserire 10-11

interfaccia 12-6

tipi 12-6

uso 6-36

Scheda tecnica

opzione KF 10-12

opzione pH 10-12

Segmentato (procedura di valutazione)



3-50

spiegazione 8-15

Segnale

acustico 6-28

d’ingresso (funz. ingresso comando a dist.) 7-15

Sequenziale

attivare l’uscita comando a distanza (funzione

ausiliaria) 6-34


Serie di campioni

cancellare 4-6

con ST20A 5-6, 5-15

con stativo auto 5-6, 5-15

introdurre 4-4

Serie di campioni (DL55/DL58)

eseguire 5-15

introdurre 4-9

Setup (menu Installazione) 2-3

simboli

lista 8-3

spiegazione 8-3

Sistema

computer/terminale 2-23

informazioni 9-3, 9-6

SLOPE (pendenza degli elettrodi) 8-3


Soglia 3-29, 3-51

Solo il salto più ripido 3-31

Soluzioni tampone

tamponi DIN/NIST 3-70

tamponi MERCK 3-69

tamponi METTLER TOLEDO 3-69

Solventi

aggiungere 2-28

cancellare 2-27

memorizzare 2-28

modificare 2-27


Indice analitico

Sonda Pt100/Pt1000 2-11

Sonda(e)

aggiungere 2-10

cancellare 2-7

funzione ausiliaria 6-4

mezzi ausiliari 2-7

modificare 2-7

opzione pH 2-10

Sonda(e) della temperatura

calibrare 6-6

memorizzare 2-12

mezzi ausiliari 2-11

Pt100/Pt1000 2-11

selezionare 3-13

spina per connettore Lemo 10-10

Sonda(e) polarizzate

aggiungere 2-14

memorizzare 2-13


modificare 2-13

opzione KF 2-13

Sono definiti (maschera)

bloccare 6-30

significato 5-5

Sostanza standard primaria 30, 31

srel (deviazione standard relativa) 8-7

ST20A

collegare 10-10

uscite 2-28

Stampante

ASCII 2-18

collegare 10-10

configurazioni 2-19, 2-20

definire 2-18

Standard (procedura di valutazione)



3-50

spiegazione 8-14

Statistica

modificare 6-22

includere nel calcolo 3-67

Stativo 1/2 (stativi di titolazione) 2-17

Stativo auto

definizione 2-17

serie di campioni 5-6, 5-15

Stativo di titolazione


montare 10-8

no. di comanda 11-7

selezionare 3-13

significato 7-8

Stativo esterno 2-17

Stato

campioni 4-7


periferiche 2-18

Stirrer (agitatore) 6-8

Svolgimento dell’analisi (esempi)

calibrazione dell'elettrodo per pH 27

con l’autocampionatore 5-17

confronto: stativo di titol. 1/ST20A 5-16

determinazione del titolo (NaOH) 32

determinazione di CaCl 2 5-7

titolazione pH-Stat 5-10

Sync (funzione) 7-18

T (temperatura) 7-10

t (titolo) 3-72, 8-3

t(max)


funzione Temperatura 7-10




t(min)


funzione Temperatura 7-10




Tabella dei valori misurati


visualizzare 5-7, 6-21

Tasti

delle istruzioni 9

di introduzione 10

freccia 7

Reset 7, 5-12

Tastiera

esterna 2-26

titolatore 7

Tastiera esterna

assegnazione dei tasti 10-15

collegare 10-15

definire 2-26

Temperatura

correttura 3-13, 3-69

funzione 7-10

introdurre 2-9, 4-6, 5-6

misurare 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37, 3-62,

3-69, 7-10

misurare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-5


Indice analitico

Tempo

di agitazione 3-16

di attesa 3-16

di mescolazione (funz. Titol. a due fasi) 7-14

di separazione (funz. Titol. a due fasi) 7-14

fisso (funz. Uscita comando a dist.) 7-16

funzione Agitare 3-16, 5-7

funzione Campione (condizionare) 3-15

introdurre 6-27

massimo (funz. Ingresso comando a dist.) 7-15

massimo (funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol))

3-61

selezionare il formato 6-26

TIME 5-4

Tendenza






Terminale

assegnazione dei tasti 10-17

collegare 10-11

configurazione 10-16


Testata del protocollo 6-27

TIME 5-4, 8-3

Titolante

aggiungere 2-6

cancellare 2-4

concentrazione 2-4, 8-3

memorizzare 2-6

modificare 2-4

Titolatore

accumulatore 6

aprire l’involucro 10-3

autodiagnosi 7

collegamenti 6, 10-10



documentazione 4

ID (identificazione) 6-27

orologio interno 6

pulire l’involucro 10-3

tastiera 7

vista anteriore 6

vista dorsale 6, 10-10

Titolazione

a punto d’equivalenza 3-20, 3-45

a punto finale 3-37, 3-56

EP (funzione) 3-37

EP (Ipol/Upol) (funzione) 3-56

EQP (funzione) 3-20

EQP (Ipol/Upol) (funzione) 3-45

manuale 6-14

manuale (Ipol/Upol) 6-16

Titolazione a due fasi

funzione 7-12

metodo speciale 7-12

Titolazione in auto-studio

funzione 3-43

resultati 5-9

Titolazione Karl Fischer

accessori 11-12

Titolo

funzione 3-11

metodi METTLER 19

metodi standard 19

Titolo (concentrazione)

controllare 2-5

determinazione (sol. di NaOH) 32

funzione 3-72

introdurre 2-4

spiegazione 30


Trasferimento dei dati (Data Transfer) 6-36

Unidirezionale (modo di trasmissione) 2-21

Unità 3-67, 8-17, 8-18

Unità di misura (sonde) 2-8

Uscita del comando a distanza

attivare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-33

funzione 7-16

Uscite del comando a distanza

definire 7-5

mezzi ausiliari 7-5

Uscite TTL

attivare 6-33

avvolg. elettronico („wiring“) 10-14


Indice analitico

Valore(i) ausiliare(i)

funzione 3-73

introdurre 2-15

memorizzare 2-16



Valore di semineutralizzazione 3-20

Valore di soglia

procedura di valutazione: asimmetrico 3-30

procedura di valutazione: minimo/massimo 3-30

procedura di valutazione: segmentato 3-31

procedura di valutazione: standard 3-30

Valore medio x


funzione Titolo 3-72

funzione Valore ausiliario 3-73

Valutazione




Varia (Misc. ...) 6-26

VDISP 3-19, 8-7

Velocità (agitatore)

definire 3-16

modificare 5-8, 6-8

Velocità della pompa (solventi) 2-27

Velocità di trasmissione

bilance 2-22

computer 2-23

stampante 2-20

terminale 2-25

VEND 8-4

VEQ 8-4

Versione del software 1-1

VEX 8-4

Vista dorsale del titolatore 10-9

Volume

introdurre 4-5, 5-6

selezionare 3-12

Volume della buretta

l’incremento più piccolo 3-24

selezionare 2-5

Volume fisso

avviso 5-5

selezionare 3-12

Volume massimo






VP1/VP2 8-4

VSTAT 8-6

VT 3-65, 8-6

VT1/VT2 8-6

VTOT 8-6

x (valore medio) 8-7

z (numero di equivalenza) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3

ZERO (punto zero degli elettrodi) 8-3


Contents

Page

ISO 9001 certificate for METTLER TOLEDO ...................................................................... 15-3

Certificado ISO 9001 para METTLER TOLEDO ................................................................. 15-3

Certificato ISO 9001 per la METTLER TOLEDO ................................................................ 15-3

Declaration of System Validation ................................................................................ 15-4

Déclaración de validación del sistema ........................................................................ 15-6

Dichiarazione di validazione del sistema .................................................................... 15-8


ISO 9001 certificate for METTLER TOLEDO

The Mettler-Toledo GmbH company, Greifensee, was examined and evaluated in 1991 by

the Swiss Association for Quality and Management Systems (SQS), and was awarded the

ISO 9001 certificate. This certifies that Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, has a quality

management system that conforms with the international standards of the ISO 9000 series.

Repeat audits are carried out by the SQS at intervals to check that the quality management

system is operated in the proper manner and is continuously updated in relation to changes

brought about.

Certificado ISO 9001 para METTLER TOLEDO

La firma Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, ha sido inspeccionada por la Asociación Suiza

para Sistemas de Calidad y Gestión (SQS), habiendo obtenido el certificado ISO 9001.

Esto acredita que Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, dispone de un sistema de gestión de

calidad que cumple las normas internacionales (ISO serie 9000).

Con motivo de las inspecciones de repetibilidad por parte de la SQS, se comprueba

periódicamente si el sistema de gestión de calidad se manipula correctamente y se ajusta

de modo continuo.

Certificato ISO 9001 per la METTLER TOLEDO

Il sistema di garanzia della qualità della Società Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, è

certificato ISO 9001 sin dal 1991 dall'Associazione Svizzera per Sistemi di Qualità e di

Gestione (SQS), e così fornisce la dimostrazione che il suo sistema Garanzia di Qualità

soddisfa i massimi requisiti.

Il sistema della garanzia della qualità Mettler-Toledo viene verificato periodicamente SQS,

dando così evidenza di un continuo aggiornamento e corretta gestione.


Declaration of System Validation

We herewith inform you that the products/systems:

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

including software and accessories were developed, tested and successfully validated according to the

international ISO9001:1994 based Life cycle rules of Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical.

Life cycle checkpoint details were reviewed and approved by the Project Supervisory Group (PSG). The

products/systems were tested to meet functional and performance specifications and release criteria at

release to shipment. In order to support GLP and validation requirements, we will make the following

documents available to an authorized, governmental or regulatory agency for inspection.

• Product Guidelines

• Performance Specifications

• Documentation Plan

• Software Specifications

• Quality Plan

• Project Management System

• Test Plan

• Customer Requirements

• Review Reports

• Source Code

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical will maintain possession of all documents and their reproductions and

may require a non-disclosure agreement to be provided by those requiring access to these documents.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Bernhard Grob Dr. Urs Spitz

January 1999 General Manager Manager Business Area

Business Unit Analytical Titration


Product Life Cycle Model

Ideas

Project Study

Project Release

Project Start

Project End

Phase:

Basic Know how

Phase:

Feasibility

Phase:

Confirmation

Phase:

Readiness

Product Guidelines

Performance Specifications

Quality Plan

Documentation Plan

Project Plan

Review Report

Software Specifications

Test Plan

Review Report

Review Report

Review Report

Usage

Customer Complaints (CRIS)

Customer Requirements

Phase out


Déclaración de validación del sistema

Por la presente le informamos que los productos/sistemas

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

incluido el software y los accesorios, han sido desarrollados, probados y verificados con éxito de acuerdo

con las reglas sobre ciclo de vida de producto de Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical. Estas reglas se basan

en la norma 9001:1994.

Los puntos de control de proyecto han sido comprobados y ratificados por el grupo de Control de Proyecto

(Project Supervisory Group o PSG). La comprobación de los productos/sistemas se ha realizado antes

de su entrega. Como apoyo a las exigencias GLP y de validación, ponemos el siguiente material a

disposición de las personas autorizadas para su examen:

• Imagen del producto

• Especificaciones

• Documentación del proyecto

• Especificaciones del software

• Plan de calidad

• Directiva Gestión de Proyecto

• Plan de ensayos

• Datos del servicio postventa y de deseos del cliente

• Protocolos de revisión

• Código fuente

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, conservará la propiedad de todo el material y sus reproducciones y

llegará a un acuerdo de confidencialidad con quienes quieran examinar este material.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Berbhard Grob Dr. Urs Spitz

Enero 1999 General Manager Manager Business Area

Business Unit Analytical Titration


Modelo del ciclo de vida de un producto

Ideas

Estudio del proyecto

Encargo del proyecto

Comienzo del

proyecto

Fin del proyecto

Fase:

Conocimientos

básicos

Fase:

Viabilidad

Fase:

Verificación

Fase:

Preparación

Imagen del producto

Especificaciones

Plan de calidad

Documentación del proyecto

Plan del proyecto

Protocolo de revisión

Especificaciones del software

Plan de ensayos




Utilización

Servicio técnico (CRIS)

Deseos del cliente

Sustitución


Dichiarazione di validazione del sistema

Con la presente Vi informiamo che i prodotti/sistemi

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

inclusi software e accessori sono stati sviluppati, controllati e validati secondo le regole tecniche

relative al ciclo vita dei prodotti della Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical. Queste regole si basano sulle

norme ISO 9001:1994.

I dettagli di controllo del progetto sono stati verificati ed approvati dall'organo di supervisione del

progetto (PSG: Project Supervisory Board). I prodotti/sistemi sono stati controllati e verificati prima

della fornitura. Per soddisfare le richieste di validazione e GLP i seguenti documenti sono messi a

disposizione per la visione da parte di personale autorizzato:

• Specifiche del prodotto

• Linee direttive

• Documentazione del progetto

• Specifiche del software

• Sistema di qualità

• Disposizioni per la gestione del progetto

• Piano dei test

• Dati del servizio clientela/esigenze dei clienti

• Rapporti di revisione

• Codice originale

La Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, rimarrà in possesso di tutti i documenti e di tutte le loro copie e

contrarrà un accordo di discrezione con coloro che desiderassero visionare tali documenti.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Bernhard Grob Dr. Urs Spitz

Gennaio 1999 General Manger Manager Business Area

Business Unit Analytical

Titration


Modello di ciclo vita di un prodotto

Idee

Studio del progetto

Realizzazione del progetto

Inizio del

progetto

Fine del progetto

Fase:

Conoscenze di

base

Fase:

Fattibilità

Fase:

Conferma

Fase:

Disponibilità

Specifiche del prodotto

Linee direttive

Sistema di qualità

Documentazione del progetto

Sistema del progetto

Rapporto di revisione

Specifiche del software

Piano dei test




Utilizzazione

Servizio clientela (CRIS)

Esigenze dei clienti

Sostituzione


To protect your METTLER TOLEDO product’s future:

METTLER TOLEDO Service assures the quality, measuring accuracy and

preservation of value of all METTLER TOLEDO products for years to come.

Please send for full details about our attractive terms of service.

Thank you.

Printed on 100% chlorine-free paper, for the sake of our environment.

*P51709614*

Subject to technical changes and to the availability

of the accessories supplied with the instruments.

© Mettler-Toledo GmbH 1997, 1998, 1999, 2003, 2004 ME-51709614F Printed in Switzerland 0408/2.12

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, Sonnenbergstrasse 74, CH-8603 Schwerzenbach,

Tel. ++41 1 806 77 11, Fax ++41 1 806 73 50, Internet: http://www.mt.com

Reference handbook - DL50 Metler-Toledo

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?